Panasonic DBS 308-616 installation

Panasonic DBS 308-616 installation
Section 300
Issue 1
August 1990
S-DBS 308/616 (V1.0)
Installation
Instructions
Small Digital Business System
308/616
Panasonic
a+
S-DBS Installation
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
FCC RULES
AND REGULATIONS
Instructions
Vl .o
(Part 68)
In compliance with the requirements of Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations for
connection of terminal equipment to the telephone network, and for your convenience,
the following information is presented.
Notifying
the Telephone
Company
When connecting or disconnecting the terminal equipment to the telephone network
inform the telephone company of the particular line (s) for connection,“the
FCC
registration number and ringer equivalence number of the registered terminal
equipment.
FCC RegMration
Model Numbers
VB-42010
(DBS308)
VB-42020 (DBSSlS)
Numb&s
Key System
ACKUSA-61853~KF-E
ACKUSA-61854KF-E
Hybrid
System
ACKUSA-61855-m-E
ACKUSA-61856-Ml?-E
When enabling Pooled Trunk Access, inform the telephone company or a Panasonic
service center of the MF-E FCC Registration number. According to FCC rules, Pooled
Trunk Access is regarded as one of the distinguishing features of a Pl3X as opposed
to a key telephone system.
RINGER
EQUIVALENCE
NUMBER
@ZEN)
0.5j B
The REN determines the number of devices you may connect to your telephone line
and still have all those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most,
but not all areas, the sum of the REIVs of all devices connected to one line should not
exceed five (5.0). You should contact your local telephone company to determine the
maximum
REN for your calling area.
Service order code
Network address signaling code
Facility interface code
Required network interface code
Connection
to a Party
Line
or Coin
9.OF
E
02LS2 (2 wire/Loop
RJ25C
Operated
Telephone
start)
Line
*
Direct Connection to a Party Line or Coin Operated Telephone Line Is Prohibited.
If you are on a party line, check with your local telephone company
information.
for further
__- -_-. .--..-----. -
S-QBS-~~laions-------
..-.-_.
_~~.
S&ion 300
Issue 1 August 1990
Vl .o
Incidence
of Harm to the Telephone
,.- .\
Lines
Should terminal equipment
cause harm to the telephone network. the telephone company shall. where
practical.
notify the customer that temporary
discontinuance
of Senrice may be required.
However,
where prior notice is not practical.
the telephone
company
may temporarily
discontinue
service
forthwith.
if such action is reasonable
in the dircumstances.
In case of m-r-notified
temporary
discontinuance
of service. the telephone company shall:
(AI
Promptly
notify
(B)
Afford the customer
discontinuance.
(C)
Inform the customer
of the right to bring a complaint
to the Co mmission
procedures
set out in Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations.
Compatibility
(Al
the customer
of such temporary
the opportunity
of the Telephone
Ax&lability
of telephone
to correct
Network
information
discontinuance
the situation
of setice.
which
and Terminal
gave rke to the temporary
Q
pGsuant
to the
Equipment
o
Technical information
on interface parameters
and specifkatfons
not set by FCC Rules, including
the number of ringers which may be connected to a particular
telephone line to permit terminal
equipment
to operate in a manner
compatible
with telephone
company
communications
facilities, shah be provided by the telephone company upon customer’s
request.
BJ
Changes
in
procedures.
telephone
company
communications
facilities,
equipment,
operations
and
The telephone
company
may make changes m its communications
facilities,
equipment.
operations
or procedures,
where such action is reasonably
required
in the operation
of its
business and is not inconsistent
with the rules and regulations
in FCC Part 66. If such changes
can be reasonably
expected to render any customer%
terminal
equipment
incompatible
with
telephone
company
communications
facilities or require modification
or alteration
of such
terminal equipment
or otherwise materially
affect its use or performance,
the customer shall be
given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity
to maintain
un-interrupted
Se.
Hearing Aid Compatibility
This system
_._.-Automatic
is hearing-aid
compatible.
Dialers
When Programmtn g Emergency
W
Remain
on the line and briefly
(B)
Perform
such
iv
activities
Numbers
explain
in the off-peak
or Making
Test Calls
to the dispatcher
hours,
to Emergency Numbers:
the reason
such as early morning
for the call.
or late evenfng.
f-“‘)
.
a
S-DBS Installation Instructions
VI .o
Section 300
----.-Issue l--August--l 990..
ResponsibiIity
The Grantee
of Grantee (Manufacturer)
or its agent
shall
the user of the registered
(C)
Instruction
indicating
that when trouble is experienced
the customer
shall disconnect
the
If so, the
registered equipment
from the telephone hne to determine whether it Is malfunctioning.
use of such equipment
shall be discontinued
until the problem has been corrected.
(D)
If comxctions
other than
equipment
FLJ25C are needed.
procedures,
where
the following:
Notification
terminal
and repair
with
(B)
that the registered
operation
equipment
Instructions
Please
installation,
Equipment
0
Product
concerning
provide
of Registered
applicable.
may not be used with party lines or coin ltnes.
contact
the local telephone
company.”
Safety
Observe
0
This product
WJ
li
wet. Ifyou
the Following
Guidelines
is an electrical
to Assure
the Safe Usi: of Your
device and can be hazardous
~~otusethfsu~~~~~-~~tub,
drop the unit into water, unplug
accidently
if immersed
The telephone
should not be exposed to heat sources, direct
moisture.
strong vibrations,
greasy or dusty environments.
(D)
Never attempt
(E)
Never clean the telephone
(F)
Never install
telephone
(G)
Never Install
telephone
03)
Never touch
d&connected
un-insulated
telephone
wires
at the network interface.
Radio Interference
wires,
pins or similar
with benzol,
wiring
during
objects
sunlight,
shower. or when
it by pulling the cord:
extreme
in the vents or openings
paint thinner
a lightning
in water.
it first, then retrieve
(C)
to insert
Telephone
or other
solvent
temperatures.
of the telephone.
materials.
storm.
jacks in a wet area unless they are specifically
or terminals
unless
designed
the telephone
for that purpose.
line has been
(Part 15)
Warning
-This unit generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions
manual, the unit may cause radio interference.
The Unit has been
tested and found to comply with the hmits for a Class A digital device pursuant
to Part 15 ofFCC Rules,
which are designed to provide reasonable
protection
against such interference
when operated in a
commercial
environment.
Op&ation
of this equipment
in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference
the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures
necessary
interference.
m which case
to correct the
If necessary,
the user should
additional
suggestions.
consult
the dealer
technician
The usermay
booklet
prepared
find the following
Somethine
This booklet
Is available
or an experienced
by the Federal
about
from the FCC local regional
radio/television
Communications
Commission
for
helpjul:
Interference
offices.
V
Section 300
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Installation Instructions
v1.0
_--.. ..-.
Table of Contents
FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS (Part 68) ............................................
Notifying the Telephone Company ....................................................
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER (REN) 0.5 B ....................................
Connection to a Party Line or Coin Operated Telephone Line.. ............ -9..
Incidence of Harm to the Telephone Lines ..............................................
Compatibility of the Telephone Network and Terminal Equipment ..........
.........................
..............................................
Hearing Aid Compatibility
Automatic Dialers ..................................................................................
Responsibility of Grantee (Manufturer)
of Registered Equipment ........
Product Safety ......................................................................................
Radio Interference (Part 15) ..................................................................
INTRODUCTION
........................................................................
POOLED TRUNK ACCESS ..........................................................
...
Ill
...
111
...
lJ.l
iii
iv
iv
iv
iv
v
V
V
1
2
........................................................................
4
Electrical Noise ......................................................................................
Gas and Airborne Particles ....................................................................
Humidity ..............................................................................................
................................................................................................
uw%
..............................................................................................
wwnm
Temperature ..........................................................................................
Vibration ..............................................................................................
Water Factor ..........................................................................................
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
ENVIRONMENT
S-DBS Installation
v1.0
Instructions
6
...........................................................................
.__._._
ma~mmoN
6
6
Main Unit ..............................................................................................
Removing
the Main
Wall-Mounting
Installing
Cabinet
Procedure
the Backup
Cover
..................................................................
for the Main Cabinet
Cover
....................................
8
9
..........................................................................
Batt&y
the System ......................................................................................
I.nitial.jzing
“lo
Key TeIephone ........................................................................................
Wall-Mounting
Procedure,
10
................................................................................
Trunk Unes ...........................................................................................
Connectingthe Trunk Lines ............................................................................
8
Internal Lines ........................................................................................
Connecting
the Telephone
................................................................................
SMDR Interface Card ...............................................................................
__--_- __
Feature
Package
Installing
‘B”
the SMDR
........................................................................................
Card ................................................................................
Doorphone Interface Card ......................................................................
Installing
the Doorphone
Interface
..................................................................
Door Box ................................................................................................
Connecting
the Door Box
................................................................................
Power Failure Unit ..................................................................................
Wall-Mounting
Connecting
Music-On-Hold
Procedure
................................................................................
the Power Failure
Unit ..................................................................
7
___...-. ..
11
11
13
13
19
19
20
22
22
24
24
25
‘25
26
(MOH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
External Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Q.
S-DBS Installation
Section 300
Issue 1 JuIy 1990
Instructions
v1.0
FIGURES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
---.-13.
Main Unit - RAM Switch ......................................................................
System Connection Layout ..................................................................
Removing the Main Cabinet Cover ........................................................
Wail-Mounting Procedure for the Main Cabinet Cover ..........................
InstaIling the Backup Battery ..............................................................
Initializing the System ..........................................................................
7. Wall-Mounting Procedure for the Key Telephone ..................................
a
8. Connecting the Trunk Lines ................................................................
9. Connecting the Telephone ....................................................................
8
10.66 Split Block .......................................................................................
11. SMDR Interface Card - Feature Package “B” ........................................
12. Installing the SMDR CARD. ..................................................................
‘Doorphone. Interface Card ....................................................................
14. Connecting the Door Box ......................................................................
15. Connecting the Power Failure Unit ......................................................
16. Connecting Music Source to the MOH Connector ..................................
17. Connecting the Paging Speaker to the Amplifier ....................................
cr
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
18
19
22
23
24
27
28
29
TABLES
1.
System Configuration
..........................................................................
2.
Extension Connector S-DBS 308/616
.
Extension Connector S-DBS 616 ..........................................................
3.
Prim&r-Gerkne&ie*
............................
..................................................
i .. .T..-.-.-i-~-i-.-P~~-~~~~..-.-.-.
........................
4. Wire Gauges ........................................................................................
1
14.15
16.17
20
22,24
5.
MOH Input Impedance
........................................................................
28
6.
EPA Output Impedance .........................................................................
29
S-DBS Installation
Section 300
Issue I August 1990
Instructions
VI.0
%s
INTRODUCTION
The S-DBS is available in two basic system configurations,
number of outside and internal lines.
TABLE
System
1. System
VB-42010/DBS
308
VB-42020/DBS
616
C~dguratio~
Trunk
Designation
.,
-
each has a different
Extension
Ports
3
6
Port%
8
a
16
9
!;
The S-DBS consists of the main unit, telephones and various peripheral equipment and requires installation, wiring and programming:This
manual describes
the installation and wiring procedures.
1
i
i!\
i‘.vs
“r.
.,,,
*
S-BBS Installation
v1.0
POOLED
Instructions
TRUNK
FROGIWIMMING
&
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
:
r
ACCESS
FOR AN AUTOMATIC
OUTSIDE
LINE GROUP
This function cannot be programmed until one umper cable on the KSU has been
cut. After cutting the cable and progr amming 2or Pooled Trunk Access, calls are
automatically connected to an outside line.
FCC Registration
c
Numbers
_
Model
Numbers
m-42010
VB-42020
(DBS308)
(DBS616)
Key System
ACKUSA-61853~IXF-E
ACKUSA-61854~KF-E
Hybrid
System
1
ACKUSA-61855~&IF-E
ACKUSA-61856~&IF-E
!*
When enabling Pooled Trunk Access. in&m the telephone company or a Panasonic
service center of the MF-E FCC Registration number. According to FCC rules, Pooled
Trunk Access is regarded as one of the distinguishing features of a PBX as opposed
to a key telephone system.
s,
MAIN
Figure
2
UNIT
1
RAM
SWITCH
HOLD
CLR
MW
lrgdi
S-DBS Installation
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
SYSTEM
CONNECTION
Instructi6ns
v1.0
LAYOUT
1
Door Opener 2
‘..
Printer
RS-232C Interface
for TTY or SMDR
Door Opener 1
CO Line
Port
COL 4
COL 5
COL 6
I-COL 1
COL 2
I
Door Phone
Adaptor
ZxtemalPaging
@.J’
[email protected]!7
tension Port 1
.l.-
I-
1
Extension Port 8
Door Phone 1
Door Phone 2
.PFu Power
!
for Music-on-Hold
Backup Battery
i
J
SLT
3
S-DBS Installation
v1.0
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
Instructions
ENVIRONMENT
Electrical Noise
-_-. .--~-..--- -~--...---.
ElectJical noise might disturb the operation of the system’s digital control circuits.
Place the equipment away from heavy motors, welders or dimmers, and radio receivers
and computers which generate electrical noise.
Conversely, this system may interfere with radio receivers and computers.
main unit at least 10 feet (3 meters) away fi-om ail other equipment.
Gas and Airborne
P&e the
Particles
To avoid corrosion or oxidation of electri al relay contacts, place the equipment in an
area free of airborne particles and corro6 ive gas.
Excessive humidity may oxidize the metallic parts and cause errors in performance.
Do not install equipment in high humidity areas.
Hxdity:
Appropriate
-- .__-30% to 90% relative
Non-Condensing
___
humidity
lighting is required when servicing the main unit.
Protect the system from lightning by properly grounding the AC cable as well as
instalhngvoltage surge suppressors and diode clamps on all external cables attached
to the system.
Temperature
Integrated circuits (ICs) and Large Scale Integrated circuits (LSXcs) require adequate
ventilation for the main unit to allow upward circulation of air through the cabinet
. grille.
I
Operating room temperature:
Storage Temperature:
4
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
-10°C to 50°C (14°F to 122°F)
%s
S-DBS Installation
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
ENVIRONMENT
Instructions
v1.0
(continued)
Vibration
Do not install
disconnection
the system in an area with excessive vibration
or loosening of components.
which can cause
Water Factor
Water is a dangerous hazard to equipment and can totally damage the system. Do not
place the equipment near anything containing water or under overhead plumbing,
sprinkler system values or in areas that are susceptible-to flooding.
B
!e
S-DBS Installation
v1.0
Instructions
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
INSTALLATION
Always set the power switch to 6E’PTEEe
the key system unit (KSU).
Use the appropriate
instaE%~~EtionnectiEithe
screwdriver to fasten the screws.
Handle the Main Unit carefully to avoid damaging the cover.
.a
1. Removing
the Main Unit Cover
0
a) Remove the two screws a from &e front cover (B) of the
main unit.
b) Remove the tiont cover (B) by pulling it to the [email protected]
aover
Frant
0b
0a
--.-
-..-__
6
SCrBw,
B
AC power to
22
*
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
INSTALLATION
2. Wall-Mounting.
___ _~_.
S-DBS Installation
Instructions
v1.0
(continued)
Procedure
for the Main Cabinet Cover
a) Attach four screws loosely to a wall stron enough
to hold the wei ht of a KSU. The screws sfl ould
- ---stand--out one- f ourth of an inch from-the wall surface.
(r
b) Pass the screws through the holes on the back of
the main cabinet and pull the cabinet in a
downward direction.
c) Tighten the two screws (A) and (B) with a screwdriver
to secure the cabinet to the wall.
(8)
*.
S-DBS Installation
v1.0
Instructions
INSTALLATl[ON
(continued)
3. Installing
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
the Backup Battery
a) Place the backup batteries (W-42130)
battery compartment of the KSU.
in the
b) Insert the connecter cord of the batteries onto
the BAT terminals of the KSU (+ and -).
(?
In case of power failure the backup battery will support normal system operation for,
approximately, 30 minutes under full-load for the DBS3Q8 system and, approximately, 20 minutes for the DBS616 system.
The batteries are trickle charged during+normal system operation.
MAIN
UNIT
CONNECTOR
BATTERY
Figure 5
n
0
_____.._..___.
_-
.._...-...
.--_--
.--.
.-.
f‘? I
ei+
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
INSTALLATION
4. Initializing
S-DBS Installation
Instructions
v1.0
(continued)
the System
a) Set the power switch of the main unit to OFF.
b) Set the RAM switch in the center of the KSU
Tom the HOLD to the CLEAR position.
Q
CJ plum the power surltcIi’?PtIie~iinitX~~ON~
d) Set the RAM switch back to-HOLD.
Ram Switch
Hold Clr
MC0
L
S-DBS Installation
v1.0
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
Instructions
KEY TELEPHONE
1. Wall-Mounting
Procedure
4 Place the telephone face down on a soft surface.
Push in on the wide end of the dark grey wall
adapter with thumbs or heels of hands until the
adapter is released.
bl Turn the adapter upside down. Insert the guides
into the two adapter mounting holes at the
lower end of the key telephone,-then
push
_--.--.. in
.._
the--adapter.
---
cl Place the mounting holes of the bracket over the
studs of the modular jack and pull the telephone
downward to secure it in place. Short station
cords are provided for wall mounting.
d) Remove the handset guide by pulling it up and out
with fingernail or screwdriver. Turn the guide
upside down and reinsert it into the handset.
Wall
10
mounting
rr-l------m
adaptor
a
Fci+
Section 300
Issue
1 August
S-DBS Installation
1990
Instructions
v1.0
TRUNKLINES
1. Connecting
the Trunk Lines
The telephone cable from the CO/PBX line can be directly connected to the outside
line jack on the main unit.
The DBS308 system has a six-pin modular jack (RI-25C) for COL 1, COL qand COL
3. The DBS616 system has two modular jacks for COL 1, COL 2 and COL 3, and COL
4, COL 5 and COL 6.
y;z.ft
the outside lines to the COL jack with a 6-w-ire modular
cord no longer than
I/
P*
___.---__
S-DBS Installation
VI.0
Instructions
TRUNK
(continued)
LINES
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
/
‘. .
MAIN
UNlT
Figure
8
.-.I
c
CN2
CO 4-6
CNl
co
1-3
111111
rc
COL
>
1
COL5
<
>
COL3
12
<
H
COL6
%+
S-DBS Installation
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
Instructions
v1.0
Use a female 25-pair cable to connect the extension ports to a 50-pin split block.
The DBS308 system has one connector on the main unit for extensions 1 to 8, DPHl,
DPH2 and PFU output. The DBS616 has two connectors for extensions 1 to 8 and
extensions 9 to 16.
Except for ports 1 and 2 which are for key telephones only, each extension port can
connect a key telephone and/or a single line telephone (SLT).
1. Connecting
---
-- --
the Telephone
-
a) For each telephone connect two wires to the
appropriate-pins of-the split @lock.--(See-TABLE 2
and Figure 10 for Extension Connectors)
i&
b) Plu the 50-pin connector of the split block
to & e extension port on the main unit.
NOTE:
The 25-pair amphenol connector which
leads to the split block is held in place by a
plastic tie. The tie can be attached to two
hooks on either side of the connector. (See
Figure 9 below)
J
S-Pair AmphenoI
hncctor
fi?!
S-DBS
TT1. *
Installation
Instructions
TABLE 2. Extension
Color
Cable Code
q*
__ ..__ -.----.--.. ----
Connector
Pin#
EXT
WH-BL
BL-WH
26
1
K-TEL
K-TEL
WH-OR
OR-WH
l-8
Section 300
---Issue--l--August
1990
for S-DBS 308/616
CUP
1 (24V)
1 GND
Station
;
Green
Red
27
2
‘3
4
Black
Yellow
W-H-GN
GN-WH
28
3
2
Zen
WH-BR
BR-WH
29
4
8’
Black
Yellow
WH-SL
SL-WH
30
5
9
10
Green
Red
RD-BL
BL-RD
31
6
‘12
Black
Yellow
RD-OR
OR-RD
32
7
::
Green
Red
RD-GN
GN-RD
33
8
15
16
Black
Yellow
RD-BR
BR-RD
34
9
RD-SL
SL-RD
35
10
Ei
Black
Yellow
BK-BL
BL-BK
36
11
21
22
Green
Red
BK-OR
OR-BK
37
12
SLT 6 (24V)
SLT 6 GND
z
Black
Yellow
38
13
gT&
;z
Green
Red
27
28
Black
Yellow
29
30
Green
Red
31
32
Black
Yellow
_____ .._-_
BK-GN
GN-BK
K-TEL
K-TEL
K-TEL
K-TEL
4 (24V)
4 GND
5 (24V)
5 GND
; g$
39
14
BK-SL
SL-BK
40
15
K-TEL
K-TEL
Y’L-BL
BL-YL
41
16
SLT 8 (24V)
SLT 8 GND
14
Green
Red
4
_
BK-BR
BR-BK
8 (24v)
8 GND
,.
Cord
i
_--.,
( I
Qf
S-DBS Installation
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
TABLE
2,
Extension
Connector
Color Cable Code
Pin#
EXT
YL-OR
OR-YL
42
17
Y-L-GN
GN-YL
for S-DBS 308/616
l-8
(continued)
CUP
Station
N/C
N/C
33
34
Green
Red
43
18
WC
WC
35.
36
Black
Yellow
YL-BR
BR-YL
44
19
N/C
N/C
37
38
Green
Red
YL-SL
SL-YL
45
20
DHP 1 (24V)
DHP 1 GND
39
40
VI-BL
RT ,-VT
46
21
[email protected] (24V)
DHE2-GND~
VI-OR
OR-VI
2;
--.
WC
’ N/C
-
41
42
Green
Red
-----.- .
43
44
Black
Yellow
45
46
Green
Red
-.
+24V to PFU
+24V to PFU
VI-BR
BR-VI
WC
WC
47
48
Black
Yellow
VI-SL
SL-VI
GND to PFU
GND to PFU
49
50
-
NOTE:
N/C = No connection
Cord
Black
Yellow
VI-GN
GN-VI
’
Instructions
VI.0
-
&&
S-DBS Installation
v1.0
TABLE
2A.
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
Instructions
Extension
Connector
Station
Pin#
WEBL
BL-WH
26
1
Green
Red
WH-OR
OR-WH
27
2
Black
Yellow
W-H-GN
GN-WH
28
3
Green
Red
WH-BR
BR-WH
29
4
-Black
Yellow
WH-SL
SL-VA3
30
5
RD-BL
BL-RD
___-. -.- __-.
RD-OR
OR-BD
31
6
Black
Yellow
32
7
Green
Red
RD-GN
GN-RD
33
8
Black
Yellow
RD-BR
BR-RD
34
9
Green
Red
RD-SL
SL-RD
35
10
Black
Yellow
BK-BL
BL-BK
36
11
21
22
Green
Red
BK-OR
OR-BK
37
12
23
24
Black
Yellow
BK-GN
GN-BK
38
13
25
Green
KiTELL5. (24v.e-.-26.---Red__-
BK-BR
BR-BK
39
14
sLT l5
SLT
15 (GND)
(24v
;;
Black
Yellow
BK-SL
SL-BK
40
15
p&
-
29
30
Green
Red
YL-BL
BL-YL
16
41
16
31
32
Black
Yellow
-- -
CUP
9
10
g g4&l
/ ,. .
*.
616
Color Cable Code
_~. .~ -...
EXT 9-16
for S-DBS
.
Cord
:+
Green
Red
_...-
Pqg
S-DBS Installation
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990.
Instructions
v1.0
~“t”‘““^~o-It60nnector-.fo~--S-DBS-6-1~-(continued)
Color Cable Code
Pin#
EXT 9-16
YL-OR
OR-YL
42
17
N/C
WC
Green
Red
Y-L-GN
GN-YL
43
18
WC
WC
Black
YelIow
YL-BR
BR-YL
44
19
WC
WC
37
38
WC
WC
39
40
YL-SL
SL-YL
Station
CUP
Green
Red
1
Black
Yellow
VI-BL
BL-VI
46
21'
N/C*
WC
41
42
Green
Red
VI-OR
OR-VI
47
22
N/C
WC
43
44
Black
Yellow
VI-GN
GN-VI
48
23
WC
N/C
45
46
Green
Red
VI-BR
BR-VI
WC
WC
VI-SL
SL-vl
WC
WC
NOTE:
N/C = No connection
Black
Yellow
49
50
Cord
Q
S-DBS Installation
v1.0
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
Instructions
66SPLITBLOCK
tlfi
308i616
K-TEL
K-TEL
1
N/C
SLT
K-TEL
,- -.
:
>
2
9
K-TEL
2
N/C
SLT
K-TEL
K-TEL
10
10
e
SLT
3
SLT
3
K-TEL
SLT
4
SLT
SLT
5
SLT
K-TEL
6
SLT6
K-TEL
7
SLT
K-TEL
8
SLT
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
DPH
1
N/C
DHP
2
N/C
N/C
N/C
PFU
N/C
N/C
GND
PFU
Figure
18
to
N/C
10
13
14
14
15
15
EC-TEL
N/C
to
l?
K-TEL
SLT
8
N/C
+24
SLT
SLT
7
12
K-TEL
’
._,
12
K-TEL
5
‘.,
11
‘K-TECL
4
K-%EL
11
16
16
c‘I
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
SMDR INTERFACE
Features
S-DBS Installation
Instructions
VI.0
CARD
Package “B”
The main unit is provided with an SMDR Interface Card connector which requires
Feature Package B, VB-42411. Place the VB-42411 cartridge in the area on the KSU
marked “Feature Package”. (See Figure 11 below)
The Card provides an RS-232C port interface which is compatible with eustomerprovided serial printers or ca.Il-accounting devices capable of generating detailed
reports for calI information, on time, duration and phone number.
Extensions
1- 8
a
p
L
c
.
---25Pa;irA;mphenol
Connector
Figure 11
19
%s
a6
S-DBS Installation
v1.0
SMDR
INTERFACE
1. Installing
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
Instructions
CARD
the SMDR Card
(continued)
(See
.___.--.-. Figur~-ur~-og-pge __21)
a) Place the SMDR card in the area on the main unit
marked “SMDR I/F’. Push the card forward to lock
it in place.
b) Use the ribbon cable attached to the SMDR card to
connect the card to the SMDR pin connector.
*
NOTE:
When connecting a pri.r$er to this system,
see Table 3 below for co?‘rect pin configuration.
TABLE 3. Printer
Connection
PRINTER CONNECTION
Q
r-x
.
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
SMDR
INTERFACE
CARD
(continued)
Q
Figure 12
S-DBS Installation
v1.0
DOORPHONE
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
Instructions
ADAPTOR
INTERFACE
CARD
The doorphone interface card supports two door boxes, provides alarm sensor
input terminals and accommodates two multi-purpose external relays.
Relay 1 has only one function: a multi-purpose
operate on either a continual or timed basis.
relay that can be programmmed
to
Relay 2 has m functions: multi-purpke
and incoming ring signal. TheQmultipurpose function can be programmed to operate on either a continual or timed basis L
Relay 1 and 2 remain in the idle state until activated by a two-digit
telephone code.
d
1. Installing
the Doorphone
Card
(Se Figure 13 on page 23)
a) Slide the doorphone card to the right inside the
grooves on the main unit.
‘.
b) Use a ribbon cable to connect the doorphone card
to the DPH outlet on the main unit.
cl Connect wires for the sensor devices and relays to
the doorphone card.
____.._.._.__
22
..-. .~-. -.-~ ----.--.---- .------.-
S-DBS Installation
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
DOORPHONE
ADAPTOR
INTERFACE
DOORPHONE
CARD
Instructions
v1.0
(continued)
+a
To
Relay 2
To
Relay 1
To
sensor
( -.L Y
=3r-u
0b
Figure13
23
I
‘,
\i
‘.a
S-BBS Installation
v1.0
DOOR
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
Instructions
BOX
The door box associated with a customer-provided electrical door opener is usually
mounted outside the building beside the front door. By pressing a button on the door
box a visitor alerts the erson inside the building who controls the door opener by
dialing an access code Prom a programmed telephone.
1. Connecting
the Door Box
CI
-.-JZa.chdoor..box.connects
two wires to a 25-pair extension cable. (See TABLE 2,
page 15) Choose the appropriate wire gauge from the table below:
-
-
TABLE 4. Wire Gauges
4;1
Wire Gauge
MaximumRange
26 AWG,
230 Feet
20 a’ (Ohms)
24 AWG
370 Feet
20 a
22 AWG
590 Feet
20 s2 (Ohms)
Figure 14
EXTENSION
CONNECTOR\
24
Resistance
(Ohins)
S-DBS Installation
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
POWER
FAILURE
Instructions
v1.0
UNIT
The Power Failure Unit (PFU) supports up to four CO PBXlines in case of power failure.
The lines are switched directly to dedicated SLTs (type 500/2500 telephone) for
incoming and outgoing calls.
When power is restored the system will automatically.retum
1. Wall-Mounting
Procedure
to normal service.
e
(See Figure 15 on page 27)
a) Remove the two screws from the PFU module andlift off the upper case.
b) Use the provided wood screw to mount the PFU
onto the wall. The wood scr&v should stick
out from the wall about 5/16th of an inch.
d Hook the PFU onto the wood screw and tighten
the screw.
4 Screw the wood screws into the holes at the
bottom of the lower case.
e) Cut the knockout parts from the bottom of the
lower case with pliers and remove the clamp
plate.
25
s
S-DBS Installation
v1.0
POWER
FAILURE
2. Connecting
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
Instructions
UNIT
.f-=.
!
(continued)
the Power Failure Unit (PFU)
(See Figure 15 on page 27)
1) Use the modular plugs to connect each trunk
line from the CO/PBX to the ‘FROM COL (COLA to D)”
jacks on the PFU. Up to four trunk lines can
be Connected to the PFU.
2) Connect the trunk lines from the TO COL (KSU)”
jacks on the PFU to the “COL”
the main
- port
__-_-on--.--__unit by uslng th e modular plugs.
-
B
-----.
3) Connect the EXT lines from the main unit to the
‘FROM SLT-LC (KSU)” jacks.
8
4) Connect each SLT line to the 7YO SLT” jacks on
the PFU.
5) Connect two wires from the.power supply terminals
on the PFU parallel to any EXT port.
6) Gather the wires back into the PFU and bring out
through the underside of the PFU and attach the wires
by clamp plate. (See (e) on Figure 15)
26
G
-c. .!
%a
S-DBS Installation
section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
POWER
FAILURE
UNIT
(continued)
Connect to COL port
I/
Instructions
v1.0
jack
co1 4
1Connectto SLT lines
Figure 15
27
-
??
S-DBS Installation
v1.0
Instructions
MUSIC-ON-HOLD
(MOH)
1. Connecting
-
w
Section 300
Issue 1 August 1990
e
~,
., i
Music Source to the MOH Connector
The MOH RCA connector is the input terminal for music-on-hold (MOH). Connect
the music source to the MOH connector on the main unit with an RCA jack.
NOTE:
If a tape recorder is connected to the MOH
connector, place the recorder five meters or
more away tiom the main unit to prevent
interference.
a
e
TABLE 5. MOH Xnput Impedance
Y
MOH terminal input impedance: 1.5k ohms maximuxn
input
level: 150mV maximum
RCA
Tape Recorder
for music-on-hold
Figure 16
i
28
:
%a
-.-.
Section 300
Issue.*xtigti3t-..lggo.
EXTERNAL
.-- _
S-DBS InstaUation Instructions
v1.0
PAGING
1. Connecting
the Paging Speaker to the Amplifier
The External Paging Amplifier
paging.
(EPA) connector is the output terminal for external
a) Connect the EPA terminal to the amplifier
input terminal.
b) Connect the paging speaker to the amplifier
output terminal.
EPA terminal
output
output
impedance:
Q
1
600 ohms
level: -20dB
EPA
CONNECTOI;
RCA
PIN
/
PLUG
I
PACING
AMPLIFIER
SPEAKER
F
Figure 17
S-DBS Installation instructions
Vl .o
ME.MO
30
Section 300
Issue I August 1990
._...,
Section 400
clclclclcl
.
Issue 1
July 1990
S-DBS 3081616 (VI -0)
’
Programming
Small
Digital
Business
System
-mhlnstructi.ons _.__.__
Y6Y
PanasonicDBSSmall
- For Models:
UB-42010 0 42020
Seeother Section 400 for other Models
Panasonk
-.
/
The information in this document is subject to change *thout notice and should not
be construed as a commitment by the Panasonic Communications
& Systems
Company (PCSC). Furthermore, PCSC reserves the right, without notice, to make
changes to equipment design as advance in engineering and manufacturing methods
.
warrant.
.
:.
.
;:
)
_
:.
. -
:
.:’
. . ,
. .
’
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS
(Part
instructions
Vl .o
68)
In compliance with the requirements of Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations for
connection of terminal equipment to the telephone network, and for your convenience,
the following information is presented.
Notifying
the Telephone
Company
When connecting or disconnecting the terminal equipment to the telephone network,
inform the telephone company of the particular line. (s) for connection. the FCC
registration number and ringer equivalence number of the registered terminal
equipment.
____-_. __
.---__ --_.-.
.- _-_...
d
FCC Registration
. Model Numbers
--\
‘....’!
VB-42010
VB-42020
(DBS308)
(DBS616)
Key System
ACKUSA-61853~KF-E
ACEUSA-6185~8X-E
Numbers
Hybrid
System
ACKUSA-61855~MF-E
ACKUSA-6185~MF-E
When enabling Pooled Trunk Access, inform the telephone company or a Panasonic
service center of the MIT-E. FCC Registration number. According to FCC rules, Pooled
Trunk Access is regarded as one of the distinguishing features of a PBX as opposed
to a key telephone system.
RINGER
EQUWILENCE
NUMBER
(REN)
0.5 B
The REN determin es the number of devices you may connect to your telephone line
ancl SIU nave a~ tnose ~~~~he~-~~~-te~~p~e~b~~i~~c~ed.
In most,
but not all areas, the sum of the REWs of all devices connected to one line should not
exceed five (5.0). You should contact your local telephone company to determine the
maximum REN for your calling area.
Service order code
Network address signaling code
Facility interface code
Required network interface code
Connection
‘-
i
9.OF
E
02LS2 (2 wire/Loop
RJ25C
start)
to a Party Line or Coin Operated Telephone
Line
.
Direct Connection to a Party Line or Coin Operated Telephone Line Is Prohibited.
If you are on a party line, check with your local telephone company for further
information.
*..
111
i
S-DBS Programming
Vl .o
Incidence
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
Instructions
of Harm to the Telephone
Lines
Should terminal equipment
cause harm to the telephone network, the telephone company shall, where
practical.
notify the customer
that temporary
discontinuance
of service may be required.
However,
where prior notice fs not practical.
the telephone
company
may temporarily
discontinue
service
In
case
of
un-notified
temporary
forthwith.
if such action is reasonable
in the circumstances.
discontinuance
of setice.
the telephone
company shall:
(A)
Promptly
(B)
Afford the customer
discontinuance.
(C)
Inform the customer
of the right to bring a complaint
to the Commission
procedures
set out in Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations.
Compatibility
(Al
Availability
notify
the customer
of such temporary
the opportunity
of the Telephone
of telephone
to correct
Network
discontinuance
the situation
of service.
which
and Terminal
gave rfse to the temporary
pursuant
to the
Equipment
information
Technical information
on interface parameters
and specffkations
not set by FCC Rules. including
the number of ringers which may be connected to a particular
telephone line to permit terminal
equipment
to operate
in a manner
compatible
with telephone
company
communications
facilities. shall be provided by the telephone company upon customer’s
request.
(B)
Changes
in telephone
procedures.
company
communications
facfities.
equipment.
operations
and
The telephone
company
may make changes
in its communications
facilities,
equipment,
operations
or procedures,
where such action is reasonably
required
in the operation
of its
business and is not inconsistent
with the rules and regulations
in FCC Part 68. If such changes
can be reasonably
expected to render any customer’s
terminal
equipment
Incompatible
with
telephone
company
communications
facilities
or require modification
or alteration
of such
terminal
equipment
or otherwise materially
affect its use or performance.
the customer shall be
given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity
to maintain
un-interrupted
sexvice.
Hearing
-
Aid Compatibility
Thi3 sjstem’is
hearing-aid
Automatic
Dialers
compatible.
when Progrsmming Emergency Numbers
or hMcing Test Calls to Emergency Numbqs:
(A)
Remaln
on the line and briefly
to the dispatcher
(B)
Perform
such activities
iv
explain
in the off-peak
hours.
such
the reason
as early morning
for the call.
or late evening.
S-DBS Programming instructions
Vl .o
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
Responsibility
The Grantee
of Grantee (Manufacturer)
or its agent
shall
provide
of Registered
the user of the registered
Equipment
equipment
with the following:
(Al
Instructions concerning instaUation. operation and repalr procedures. where apphcable.
(B)
Notification that the registered terminal equipment may not be used with party lines or coin lines.
(C)
Instruction indicating that when trouble is experienced the customer shall disconnect the
registered equipment from the telephone line to determine whether it fs malfunctioning. If so. the
use of such equipment shall be discontinued until the problem has been corrected.
D)
If connections other than RJ25C are needed. contact the local telephone company.
&I
This product is an electrical device and can be hazardous if immersed in water.
IB) To avoid the risk of electrical shock do not use this unit while in the bathtub. shower, or when
wet. If you [email protected] drop the unit into water, unplug it first, then retrieve it by pulling the cord.
The telephone should not be exposed to heat sources, direct sunlight, extreme temperatures,
moisture, strong vibrations. greasy or dusty environments.
Dl
Never attempt to Insert wires, pins or similar objects in the vents or opemngs of the telephone.
0’9 Never clean the telephone with benzol. paint thinner or other solvent materials.
03 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
(G) Never install telephone jacks in a wet area unless they are specifically designed for that purpose.
WI
Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
Radio Interference
(Part 15)
-This unit generates. uses and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used
in accordance with the instnxtions manual, the unit may cause radio Interference. The Unit has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules,
which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a
commercial environment.
Ww
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case
the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures necessary to correct the
Interference.
If necessary. the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television
additional suggestions.
:--
technfcfan for
The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpfui:
1
Somethinv
about
Interference
This booklet is avaflable from the FCC local regional ofI%xs.
S-DBS Programming Instructions
v1.0
Section 400
Issue 1 JuIy 1990
.-- -
Table of Contents
FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS (Part 68) ..........................................
Notifying the Telephone Company ................................................
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER (REN) 0.5 B ..................................
Connection to a Party Line or Coin Operated Telephone I.&e ................
Incidence of Harm to the Telephone Lines .............. ..- ..........................
Compatibility of the Telephone Network and Terminal Equipment ........
Hearing Aid Compatibility ....................................................................
AutCimaticDial&
................................................................................
Responsibility of Grantee (Manufacturer) of Registered Equipment ......
Product Safety ......................................................................................
Radio Interference (Part 15 ..................................................................
PROGRAMMING
GUIDELINES
Before programming
...
Ill
...
IJl
...
Ill
iii
iv
iv
iv
iv
..
V
V
-_
C.)
V
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
the small DBS system . . . . . . ..*.................................
1
PROGRAMMING DATA TABLE FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM BEFORE PROGRAMMING ................ 3
Before programming
for the fast time ..................................................
SMALL DIGITAL BUSINESS SYSTEM PSD KEY
SETI'INGS
..........
4
PSD 1 Key - System setting ..................................................................
4
PSD 2 Key - Trunk setting ....................................................................
4
PSD 3 Key - Extension and ring setting ................................................
4
PSD 4 Key - Feature assignment ..........................................................
4
PSD 5 Key - Toll restriction
4
__ ____.-_.--__
PSD6Key-TIYsetting
setting
......................................................
........................................................................
SMALL-DBS KEY TELEPHONE
..................................................
PROGRAMMING KEYS ..............................................................
vi
3
4
5
6
.
( .--,j
-- ._-----.
SeWon 4UO
Issue 1 July 1990
sLDBsrg
Ins~ctions
v1.0
HOW TO ENTER THE PROGRAM MODE ....................................
Attendant’s phone ..............................................................................
ON/OFF key of POWER SEEING
HOW TO PROGRAM
DATA TERMINAL
7
7
7
......................................................
..................................................................
PROGRAMMING
8
............................................
9
ENTERING
THE DATA TERMINAL
PROGRAMMING
MODE ..........
program the key telephone for data terminal programming ..................
Access data terminal programming ......................................................
.a
9
9
9
DATA TERMINAL
KEYBOARD
PROGRAMMING
KEYS ................
Key telephone ......................................................................................
Data terminal ......................................................................................
10
10
10
HOW TO PROGRAM
FEATURES
WITH A DATA TERMINAL
11
..........................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*................................................
l2,13
..........................................................
DEFAULT DATA TABLES
PSD 1 Key - System setting ..................................................................
PSD 2 Key - Trunk setting ..................................................................
FSD 3 Key - Extension setting ............................................................
PSD 4 Key - FF Key assignment setting ................................................
Flexible function @?I?)key assignments ........................................
How to program the FF’ keys for individual telephones ................
PSD 5 Key - Toll restrictions
PSD6Key-TTYsetting
................................................................
......................................................................
........................................
PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM FEATURES
_.- .... -.-__.__
..
.. -- ... . ..
PSD 1 Key - System setting ..................................................................
PSD
PSD
PSD
PSD
2 Key - Tank setting ..................................................................
3 Key - Extension setting ............................................................
4 Key - FF key assignment ..........................................................
5 Key - Toll restrictions ................................................................
......................................................................
PSD6Key-TrYsetting
Index
.. ... ... ... ... .... .... .... .... ... ....... ... ...... .. .... ... ... .. .... ... ... ... ...... ..
14
14
15
16
17
17
18
19
20
21
21
37
44
49
-51
61
63
Section 400
Issue .l ..JulEl990.
PROGRAMMING
Before pro graag
S-DBS Programming
--
Instnxt$ln;
.
GUIDELINES
the small DBS system:
a)
Make certain all connections to the main unit have bee6
properly installed and tested. See the Installation
Instructions
manual, Section 300.
b)
Complete the programming table form with all necessary
information obtained from the end user. See page.2.
cl
Perform the initialization
See page 3.
procedure before programming.
a
S-DBS Programming
VI.0
PROG-G
Instructions
DATA
TABLE
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
((..--. i
1
FORMS
Enter features and installation specifications in a programming
See the Programming Table manual, Section 450.
table form.
C:.)
2
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Programming
Instxuc~ln~
.
-
-___--
INITIALKXNG
THE
Before programmin
SYSTEM
BEFORE
PROGRAMMING
g for the first time, reset the system as follows:
1. Turn off the power for the Main Cabinet.
2. Set the RAlld switch to 9XZAR”.
3. Turn the power for the Main Cabinet back on.
4. Set the RAM switch to “HOLD”.
a
NOTE:
This is a one-time operation. If the procedure
is repeated at the next programming session, aJl
previously programmed data will be erased.
.
3
S-DBS Programming
VI.0
SMALL
DIGITAL
Instructions
BUSINESS
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
SYSTEM
PSD KEY SETTINGS
The system consists of the following 6 modes. Each of these modes is represented
by personal speed dial’ (PSD) keys l-6. See figure I on page 5 of this section.
1.
PSI) 1 Key - System Setting:
Contains ail of the feature options which are system-wide
based.
PSD 2 Key - ‘Bunk
2.
Setting:
Contains aII of the feature options on a per line basis.
3.
PSD 3 Key - Extension
and Ring Setting:
Contains all of the feature options on a per station basis.
4.
PSD 4 Key - Feature Assignment:
Contains
5.
all nf~ens~~~~e~k~~~~~~~~~as~s.--
PSD 5 Key - Toll Restriction
0
..
Setting:
Contains aI.I of the program steps for performing toll restrictions
on a per line per station basis.
6.
PSD 6 Key - TTY Setting:
Contains aU of the features on the TIY port.
.
iJ
4
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
SMALXAH3S
Instructions
v1.0
KEY TELEPEIONE
PSD 6
0
PSD 1
PSD 7
m
PSD 8
0
PSD 2
PSD3
nnnnn
‘. .
FIGURE I
PSD 9
PSD 10
0
0
PSD 4
PSD 5
One-Touch
=V=
S-DBS Programming Instructions
v1.0
PROGRAMMING
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
KEYS
HOLD
- Assigns data ~~advances-to-~~~~~er.port at the same address.
FLBH
- Assigns data and returns to the previous
port at the same address.
#
- Assigns data and advances to the next higher
address at the same port.
*
- Assigns data and returns to the previous
address at the same port.
AUTO
- Moves to a higher or lower address at the
same port by pressing AUTO and entering the
new address.
CONF
- Clears data
REDIAL
- Resets data
VOL APROG
- Moves to higher ports either assigning data
to a port or copying data from one port to
another.
NOTE:
VOL VPROG
..___
Some data cannot be copied from port
to port. Text under each address in
this manual is noted accordingly.
- Moves to lower ports either assigning data
to a port or copying data from one port to
i3IlOtb~.
NOTE:
Some data cannot be copied from port
to port. Text under each address in
this manual is noted accordingly.
.
..- -.~~-.
MUTE
6
‘.
- recarries new data to the next higher port
by pressing the MUTE key. Press the MUTE
key again to enter the new data and advance
to the next higher port.
’ I
k. .. i
S-DBS I’rogmmmin
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
HOW TO ENTER
Attendant’s
THE PROGRAM
g Instruct$oln;
.
MODE
Phone:
-~--Eiisy $Ei2esSe
programmin g is performed from an attendant’s
telephone as follows:
l-ON/OFF
2. PROG
3. # #
4. One-touch key (PSD Key)
An attendant’s
or 11).
telephone is connected to extension ports 1 and 2 (extensions 10
ON/OFF Key or POWER SETTING:
,.-.
j
There are three exceptions to programming from the attendant’s
following addresses can only be programmed using the POWER
telephone.
PSD 1 - addresses:
0005 (Outside lines)
0035 (SLT on-hook detection timer).
PSD 3 - address:
(lo-251 13 C (Hybrid system/dual
1. Power ON
2. Enter data
3. Power OFF
4. Power ON
NOTE:
C = Can be copied from port to port.
The
SETTING:
port operation).
S-DBS Frogramming
v1.0
Instnxtions
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
HOW TO PROGRAM
Following is an example of how to program using the system’s
feature:
DATE
a) Using the attendant’s telephone at extensions 10 and 11,
program the DATE as follows:
1. ON/OFF
.
2. PROG
3. # #
The system is now in Program Mode.
-.
c,
b) The date feature is a
tern-wide setting, so press the PSD 1 key to
program a change of Tate.
PSI) 1 - System setting
_.~ ._-.- --- - -- .--?SD.?- Tru_nksetting
PSI) 3 - Extension
PSD 4 - Feature
-_._
and ring
setting
assignment
PSD 5 - Toll restriction
setting
PSD6-TTYsetting
c) Enter the foIlowing PSD 1 address for the date:
0001 #
The system is now fn Date Set Mode. To set the date enter the Year
(YY), Month (MM) and Day (DD) as follows:
YYMMDD#
8
.
c-.)
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
DATA
TERMINAL
S-DBS Programming
Instructions
v1.0
PROGRAMMING
You can also program the system using a data terminal which gives you the advantage of checking the programmin g steps on the display screen before making
final changes. At every stage in the programmin g there are help screens available
@the “H” kevonthete-nninalkeyb.oar_d.~
---. _
ENTERING
THIi: DATA
*E-AL
PROGRAMMING
Program the access code &om the key telephone
ming as follows:
MODE
fo; Data Terminal
Program-
1. CONF
2. #
,’ -
.
I
3. 6
.
4. Program &digit ID code from the attendant’s
phone.
5. Press HOLD
Access Data Terminal Roe
as follows:
1. Press ON/OFF key
2. #
3. Enter 99
4. Enter programmed
NOTE:
4-digit ID code
The optional Station Message Detail Recorder (SMDR)
interface is required.
9
S-DBS Programming
v1.0
Instructions
DATA
KEYBOARD
TERMINAL
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
PROGRAMMING
. ..
KEYS
The programmin g keys for the telephone are the equivalent of the following control
keys on the data terminal keyboard.
KEY TELEPEONE
._ ._.__..- .-.-.-
DATA
TERMINAL
- .---.
=
HOLD
CONTROL D
(Next
port)
A
FLASH
=
CONTROL s
(Previous port)
#
=
CONTROL x
(Next address)
*
=
CONTROL E
(Previous address)
AUTO
=
ESCAPE
(Program set mode)
CONF
=
DELETE
(Clears data)
VOL A PROG
=
CONTROL T
VOL v PROG
=
CONTROL v
(Moves to previous
port with data.)
=
CONTROL u
(Carries new data to
the next port)
=
CONTROL 2
CErdt)
ON/OFF
NOTE:
10
In Small DBS V. 1.0 Control D and Control S are
incorrectly deiined in the terminal.
Both are correct as stated above.
.
c-3 :
S-DBS Programmin g Instructi+3In.
.
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
HOW TO PROGRAM
WITH
A DATA TERMINAL
At the REMT> prompt press “H” for help.
The screen will prompt you to select from the Maintenance Mode menu:
P = Program
Set
S = Speed,Dial Set
Control
2 = 33xit
If you enter ,P” (P plus return) the screen will display the following:
REMT> P
DBS System Prog
Rag>
At the Rag> prompt press “H”. The screen will display the PSI) Key set-s
menu and the Rag> rompt again. At the Rag> prompt press the Tilde key (-)
followed by number oFthe setting, for example, “-01” for System
programming and press return.
At the 01 Sys> prom t press return again. The fast address in the system. (the
date) will appear on % e screen:
. ~- _~.___.
__.
SO001
~_.
900809
-D)
The screen will advance to the next address every lime you press return or you
can change the date in address ‘0001” from August 8, 1990 to August 10. 1990,
for example, by entering (press return) 900810.
The screen will advance to the next address. To check that the date is entered
correctly press ‘Control
E” to bring you back to the previous address which in
our example is ‘0001”.
Pressing “H” for help at any stage will access control key menus and other information to help you move from port to port or address to address, access a menu,
return to a previous operation or exit.
.
---11
bs
3
‘3
S-DBS Programming
v1.0
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
Instructions
SETTINGS
TRUNK
SYSTEM
Answering Calls (Automatic)
Busy Override
--.._-_..-
-.-_COW=%?
ata Security
0032
d
(01-06) 18.19.2OC
r)elayed Ring
blal Tone Stop/Internal
Door Boxes A and B
0039
hAsI3Key
0019
eadsetMode
Hybrid System/Dual
Port Operation
bIlmde~cxf-Hooksignal
omS(AlatT-1
Faging
-I
Pooled Trunk Access
b
(01-06) 11 c
I
r
oo4o.0041
Station Lockout Capability
Station Lockout Types
Toil Restriction System
I’ransfer On-Hook (Automatic)
,025
,Voice Announce Off-Hook (Manual)
NOTE:
_---_
C = Can be copied fkom port to port.
I
e
I
12
___--
L
-
ia
.*
t
S-DBS Frogramming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
EXTENSIONS
FF KEYS
TRS
Instructions
v1.0
I
(lo-251 12 C
.
13
S-DBS Programming Instructions
v1.0
DEFAULT
DATA
TABLES
PSD 1 Key - System
ADDRESS
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
Setting
FEAxuRE
PAGE
DEFAULT
Date
OOQ5P
0006-0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
Time Dfsplay
Time
Days of Week
Outside Lines
[Auto) Pause-Digits l-9.0
(Auto) Pause Timer
SMDR Timer
FLASH-RKDIAL &Auto)
CO FLASH Timer Off-Hook
SSD CO FLASH Timer
Dial Pause Timer
CO Line Guard Timer
Pulse Dial/Minimum Pause
Switch Tfme/Night (Auto)
Transfer On-Hook (Auto)
One-Touch Key
Background Music (BGM)
Information Tone
3 lines/6
0038
0039
0041
0042
.OO45
NOTE:
P = Power Setting:
lines
No pause
3 seconds
15 seconds
Auto FI&H
1 second
0.5 second
0.75 second
0.75 second
64oms
Day mode
Disable
One-touch call
Disable
Voice calls and
Paging calls
No alert tone
Not displayed
Not displayed
Cannot interrupt
15Oseconds
150 seconds
CO Line Off-Hook Signal
Station Lockout ID Code
SSD Display Restriction
Data Security
Ext. HOLD Recall Timer
Transfer Recall Timer
SLT Detect. Timer/On-Hook
SLT CO HOLD
SLT Intercom Ring Pattern
-..
CPC Signal Timer
Door Box Speech Path
Sensor Detecting Signal
Sensor Alarm Ring Stop
Multi-Purpose Relay 2
Function
Mttlti-Purpose Relay 1
Operation
Multi-Purpose Relay 2
Operation
Multi-Purpose Relay 1
Operation Timer
MultIPurpose Relay 2
Operation Timer
0035P
0036
0037
21
21
21
22
22
23-26
26
27
27
27
28
28
28
29
29
29
30
30
12-hour system
12oOool
Monday
.
Lessthan25oms
System HOLD
Internal ring
slgnal pattern
No signal
No speech path
-f&z-l
signal stops alarm
Multi-purpose
relay 2
&lay=
time
Party Control
..- ..__.___
34
35
35
35
14
.._. ..--
33
34
34
34
34
35
3 seconds
___
30
30
31
31
31
32
32
33
33
programmed
Relay as programmed
time
3 seconds
CPC = Calling
0
-.-..----.
.
_i,
li
I
___----
--.--.-
_-.-_. . _ _
Section 400
Issue 1 July
1990
DEFAULT
DATA
PSD 2 Key - Tnmk
S-DBS programming
Instructions
In.0
TABLES
Setting
ADDRESS
FEATURE
DEFAULT
PAGE
(01-06) 01;M
02 c
03 c
04C
05 c
06 C
07 c
08 C
09 c
Dial Signal/CO Line
DTMF Signal Sending T5me
Connected Phone Line
(Auto) Pause PE3.XLine
IXMF Signal Conver.fAuto)
M’MF Conversion (Manual)
DTMF Signal TimeMMF Signal Time Table
-__
CO Line Disconnect CPC
Signal Detection
CFC Detecting Timer
Pooled Trunk Access
Dial9
Pooled Trunk Access (PTA)
Group
Incoming Ring Tone
Pattern
Incoming Rfng signal
Detection Time
Incomfng Ring Pattern
Detection Timer
External RCngerOper.
Incoming Call Forwarding
Delayed Ring Function
Operation
Delayed Ring
Transferrhg Time
Delayed Ring Transfer
to Extenslon Numbers
10 pps pulse dial
80 ms ON/80 ms OFF
CO line
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
10 c
11 c
12116
13 c
14 c
15 c
16 C
17 c
18 C
19 c
20 c
NOTE:
No pause
Disable
Enable
No change
- 16OmS
30 detection of CPC
Srgnd
More than 304 ms
Pooled trunk
access dial 9
Not subject to FTA
38
38
38
39
Synchronized ring
tone
More than 350 ms
39
39
6 seconds
40
Disable
call forwarding
D&sable
40
40
40
Disable
41
Clear
41
C = Can be copied from port to port
M = Can be copied only with the MUTE Key; copy mode will
change in titure version of S-DBS.
CPC = Calling Party Control
.
S-DBS Programming Instructions
v1.0
DEFAULT
DATA
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
TABLES
PSD 3 Key - Extension
Setting
ADDRESS
FTEATURE
DEFAULT
(10-25) 01 c
Day Incoming RFng
Clear (12-25)
Trunks l-6 (10.11)
Clear (12-25)
Tmnks l-6 (10.11)
No pickup
Accepts Internal
calls (12-25)
Outside/Internal
calls (10,llf
Clear
No ring (12-25)
Rtng IlO.11)
Eib door box
calls (12-25)
DoorBoxAandB
CalIs (10.11)
Time displayed
Impossible
,
Accepted
Disable
Rejection
02 c
Night Incoming Ring
03C
04C
Answer (Automatic)
call waiting
05 c
06 C
Paging Groups
Sensor Alarm Ring
.----07 c-
08 c
09 c
10 c
11 c
12 c
13 P c
14C(See
below)
15 c
16
17
NOTE:
Door Box Calls
Call Duration Display
Busy Override
Busy Override Rejection
Data Security
Voice Announce OfFHook
ucinuall
Hybrid System/Dual Port
Key Telephone Extension
Lockout in Night Mode
SLT CO Line Dial
Headset Mode
Dial Tone Stop-Internal
42
42
43
43
43
43
44
44
44
44
45
45
Hybrid operation
Functioning
45
45
DTMFsQnal
Not connected
D&able
45
46
46
P = Power Setting: C = Can be copied from port to port.
1 4-G=+UtenWt~one;-ports
another port.
16
PAGE
-I-and-2;-czuuxot-.be -changed to
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
DEFAULT
DATA
---_.
Instructions
v1.0
TABLES
PSD 4 Key - FF Key Assignment
Setting
ADDRESS
FEATURE
DEFAULT
PAGE
ouo2
0003
FFKey-2
FFKey-3
FFKey-4
FFKV-5
FFKey-6
COLine2
COIAne3
COLine4
COLine5
COUne6
47
47
47
47
48
ooo5
0006
Flexible
hrnction
(FF) Key Assignments
FIUTURES
KEY OPElUTION
Attendant ..............................................................
Call Forwarding ....................................................
Call Pickup Directed ............................................
CaII Pickup Group ................................................
cau waiting ..........................................................
Data Security ........................................................
Dial CO Access ......................................................
Dial Tone Stop/Internal ........................................
Display Contrast ..................................................
Do-Not-Disturb ....................................................
Door Box ..............................................................
Headset ................................................................
Meet-Me Answer ..................................................
..................................................
Message Waiting
Mode A-B Change ................................................
NW Key ..............................................................
PagingZone 1 ......................................................
PagingZone
......................................................
PagfngZone3 ......................................................
AU-Zone Paging ....................................................
Pooled Trunk Access ............... ..i ..........................
.....
Repeat ..................................................................
0
72
79
70
3
Save
......................................................................
Sh4DR....................................................................
Station Lockout ....................................................
Tone CalIs ............................................................
TI-W& Quelling ....................................................
Voice Announce ....................................................
Voice Announce Answer ......................................
NOTE:
AUTO,
AUTO,
#
88N
#50
#
73
61.62
#51
77
2
69
#52
#Ol
#02
#03
#OO
9 or 81-83
AUTO,
l
AUTO, AUTO,
l
#93
74
1
2
5
l3
.
The FF keys are a system-wide setting. Every telephone is
assigned the same code. See page 18 for instructions on
how to program individual telephones.
17
S-DBS Programming
v1.0
_.__.-.-- _--._.
HOW TO PROGRAM
Instructions
THE
FF KEYS FOR INDIVIDUAL
1. Press ON/OFF key
2. Press PROG key
3. Press FF Key
4. Enter 4-digit code [maximum)
5. Press HOLD key
18
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
TELEPHONES
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
DEFAULT
DATA
TABLES
P!3D 5 Key - Toll Restrictions
FEATURE
DEFAULT
PAGE
0001
System Installation
Area Code
PBX Internal CalI
Restriction
PBX Incoming calls
Prohlbited
Madmum Number’Of
Digits Dialed
Dialing Restriction
during Incoming Calls
#and*KeysDia.I
Restriction
Station Lockout Types
PBXDigits l-9.0
SSD Toll Restrictions
Override
Cancelling 6-Digit
Restriction Types 2 and 3
Cancelling S-Digit
Restriction Type 3
Station Lockout Capabil.
SSD Toll Restrictions
Cancelled
Day Restriction TypesTnmks l-6
Night Restriction TypesTrunks l-6
Area code only
49
PBX intercom calls
49
FJl3xincomtngcalls
49
No restrictions
49
No reh-ictions
50
Restricted
50
Q-w0
50
50-53
ooo3
OQO5
0006
oOo7
0008-0017
.------ff18..
.-- .--..
x~
._
.
ADDRESS
0002
. I
Instructions
v1.0
0101-0116
0201-0216
(lo-251 01 C
02
03-08
c
C
09-14 c
NOTE:
No digits dialed
54
54
54
Disabled
Restricted
55
55
Type4
55-56
Type4
57-58
C = Can be copied from port to port.
.
S-DBS l?rogra.mm.ing Instructions
v1.0
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
--_
DEFAULT
DATA
. ..-.--
-
TABLES
PSD 6 Key - TTY Setting
ADDRESS
FEATURE
0101
0102
0103
SMDR Printing Mode 1
SMDRPrinting
Mode 2
‘ll-ans~sion
SpeedBaud Rate
Stop Bit Length
Data Lmigth
Parity Check
Even/Odd
Parity
0104
0105
0106
0107
20
DEFAULT
OwPing
PAGE
and data
59
59
59
1 bit
8 bits
No parity check
Even nuqber
parity
59
59
60
60
Data titles
1200 bps
S-DBS Programming
Se&n 400
Issue 1 July 1990
~ROGlU&WIING-
SYSTEM
PSD 1 KEY - SYSTEM
Instructions
v1.0
FEATURES
SETTING
4ddress#-(data)#>
OOOl#--I))#
DATE
To set the date to February 25. 1995, enter the Year 0,
(DD) as follows:
a
Month (MM) and Day
950225#
The date is also recorded during Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR).
--.-
NOTE:
0002#-(0
TIME
or l)#
DISPLAY
O#: 12-Hour Svstem
1#:24-Hour System
TIME
HH=Hours;
MM=Minutes;
SS=Seconds, N=l or 2.
To set the time to 3:28 P.M. and display it, enter the hour and minutes followed by
1 for A.M. or 2 for P.M.:
03282#
To return to the default value 12:OO”OOA.M enter as follows:
1200001#
.
S-DBS Programming
v1.0
Section 400
Instructions
Issue 1 July 1990
0004#-(l-7)#
DAYS OF THE WEEK
The day of the week iS automatically
address 000 l#.
set at the same time the date is set using
l#: Sunday
2#: Mondav
3#: Tuesday
4#: Wednesday
5#: Thursday
6#:
Saturday
7#: Friday
NOTE:
The days of the week are also recorded during SMDR
0005#-(l-7)#
SETTING OUTSXDE LINES
l#: 1 line
2#:2lines
3#: 3 lines (308 initial)
4#:4lines
5#: 51ines
6#: 6 lines (616 initial)
NOTE:
22
Outside lines can only be set using the POWER SETTING.
See page 7 in this manual for instructions.
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
Instructions
v1.0
OOOS#-(l-S)#
AUTOBBATICPAUSE-DIAL1
Automatically inserts a pause during dialing. When accessing a CO line through
PBX, it can take several seconds from the time the Iine is accessed to when it
connects with a CO (outside) line.
COIW No automatic
1#: .Automatic pause
2#: Automatic pause
3#: Automatic pause
4#: Automatic pause
5#: Automatic pause
6#: Automatic pause
7#: Automatic pause
8#: Automatic pause
na se
.be&e
before
before
before
before
before
before
before
.
afte d .ahng
the ‘1 si digit
the 2nd digit
the 3rd digit
the 4th digit
the 5th digit
the 6th digit
the 7th digit
the 8th digit
d .pit
&er
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
1
dialing
dialing
dialing
dialing
dialing
dialing
dialing
diaIi.ng
1
1
1
1
1’
1
1
1
Numbers dialed before the connection is made result in a wrong number.
‘:This setting also affects dialing SSD and PSD numbers.
Pause time is set with the Automatic
Pause Timer at:
0016#-(0,1-7)#
NOTE:
Each trunk
must be set for automatic
PSD 2 Key,Address
pause in PSD 2 as follows:
(Ol-06)~04#-(0
or l)#
OOO?#-(I-8)#
AUTOMATICPAUSE-DIAL2
CONF: No automatic
l#: Automatic pause
2#: Automatic pause
3% Automatic pause
4ff; Automatic pause
5#: Automatic pause
6#: Automatic pause
7#: Automatic pause
8#: Automatic pause
cause
before
before
before
before
before
before
before
before
after dialing
the 1st digit
the 2nd digit
the 3rd digit
the 4th digit
the 5th digit
the 6th digit
the 7th digit
the 8th digit
di gi&&
a $er d&kg
a ter dialing
a hrdialiIlg2
a ker dialing
a z&di.g
a ker diaIing
a Iter diaIi.ng
a ker dialing
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
23
a
S-DBS Programming
v1.0
Instructions
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
* ...
OOOS#-(l-8)#
AUTOMATIC
..---.-.-c6NF:
PAUSE
..No-aut~m.atic~
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
0009#-(
pause
pause
pause
pause
pause
pause
pause
pause
- DIAL
3
-Dause-after dialing
le 1st digit
ne 2nd digit
before t xe 3rd digit
before t le 4th digit
before t le 5th digit
before t le 6th digit
before t ze 7th digit
before t xe 8th digit
E$E:
digit--3-.after dialing
af’ter dialing
after dialing
after dialing
after dialing
after dialing
after dialing
after dialing
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
_ .L
_
l-8)#
AUTOMATIC
PAUSE
CONF: No automatic
l#: Automatic pause
2#: Automatic . pause
. (ddigit.after
4#: Automatic pause
5#: Automatic pause
6#: Automatic pause
7#: Automatic pause
8#: Automatic pause
- DIAL
4
Dause after dialing digit 4
before the 1st digit after ( ,jaIing4
before the 2nd digit after ( ding4
.( ,[email protected] the 4th digit after ( .ialing 4
before the 5th digit after ( .ialing 4
before the 6th digit after ( .ialing 4
before the 7th digit after ( Ming 4
before the 8th digit after ( .ialing 4
OOlO#-( l-8)#
AUTOMATIC
PAUSE
CONF: No automatic
l#: Automatic pause
2#: Automatic pause
3#: Automatic pause
4#: Automatic pause
5#: Automatic pause
6#: Automatic pause
. 7#: Automatic pause
8% Automatic pause
24
- DIAL
pause
before
before
before
before
before
before
before
before
5
a Rer dialing
t xe 1st digit
t le 2nd digit
t le 3rd digit
t ze 4th digit
t 3e 5th digit
t xe 6th d&t
t le 7th digit
t le 8th digit
diu
after dialing 5
after dialing
5
after
after
after
after
after
after
5
5
5
5
5
5
dialing
dialing
dialing
dial&~
dialing
dialing
.
(I
)
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
Instructions
v1.0
OOll#-(l-8)#
AUTOMATIC
PAUSE
CONF: No automatic
l#: Automatic pause
2#: Automatic pause
3#: Automatic pause
4#: Automatic pause
5#: Automatic pause
6#: Automatic pause
7#: Automatic pause
8#: Automatic pause
0012#-(
- DIAL
Dause
before
before
before
before
before
before
before
before
6
a Fter diaiing digit 6
t le 1st
t le 2nd
t le 3rd
t xe 4th
t ze 5th
t ne 6th
t ne 7ti
t he 8th
digit
digit
digit
digit
digit
digit
digit
digit
after
afkr
after
after
after
after
after
after
dialing
dialing
dialing
diaIi.ng
dialing
dialing
dialing
dialing
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6-
a fter dialing digit 7
t xe 1st digit after dialing
t 3e 2nd digit after dialing
t xe 3rd digit after dialing
t ze 4th digit after dialing
t ze 5th digit-after dialing
t ze 6th digit after dialing
t he 7th digit after dialing
t he 8th digit after dialing
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
l-8)#
AUTOMATIC
PAUSE
CONF: No automatic
l#: Automatic pause
2#: Automatic pause
3#: Automatic pause
4#: Automatic pause
-5#: Automatic-pause
6#: Automatic pause
7#: Automatic pause
8#: Automatic pause
- DIAL
Dause
before
before
before
before
before
before
before
before
7
00 13#-( 11-8)#
AUTOMATIC
PAUSE
COW: No automatic
l#: Automatic pause
2#: Automatic pause
3#: Automatic pause
4#: Automatic pause
5#: Automatic pause
6#: Automatic pause
7ti: Automatic pause
--8~~gitafter..t
- DIAL
Dause
before
before
before
before
before
before
before
8
after dialinp
the 1st digit
the 2nd digit
the 3rd digit
the 4th digit
the 5th digit
the 6th digit
the 7th digit
dirriu
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
( Ming
( .ialing
( ialing
c ialiq8
( Ming8
( Ming
( Ming
8
8
8
8
8
ialing8___-~-_.-.
.
_
..
S-DBS Programming
v1.0
0014#-(
Instructions
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
:,:r -. i
l-8)#
AUTOMATIC
PAUSE
CONF: No automatic
- DIAL
9
Dause after dialing digit 9
e 1st digit after dialing 9
2ntii~giCifter~~didiTig~
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
pause
pause
pause
pause
pause
before
before
before
before
before
the
the
the
the
the
3rd
4th
.5th
6th
7th
8th
digit
digit
digit
digit
digit
digit
after
after
after
after
after
after
dialing
dialing
dialing
dialing
dialing
dialing
9
9
9
9
9
9
.
0015#-(l-8)#
AUTOMATIC
PAUSE
- DLAL 0
CONF: No automatic Dause after dialine dipit 0
l#: Automatic pause before the 1st digit after dialing 0
2#: Automatic pause before the 2nd digit after dialing 0
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
7#: Automatic
8#: Automatic
pause
pause
pause
pause
pause
pause
before
before
before
before
before
before
the
the
the
the
the
the
3rd
4th
5th
6th
digit
digit
digit
digit
7th digit
8th digit
after
after
after
after
after
after
dialing
dialing
dialing
dialing
dialing
dialing
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0016#-(OJ-7)#
AUTOMATIC
PAUSE
TIMER
The pause timer can be set within a range of 2 to 9 seconds.
O#: 2-second pause
l#: 3-second Dause
2#: 4-second pause
3#: 5-second pause
4#: 6-second pause
5#: 7-second pause
6#: 8-second pause
7#: g-second pause
NOTE:
Set the pause timer at the automatic pause position.
See PSI) 1 key addresses 0006-001.
When REDIAL is stored in SSD and PSD a pause is automatically
inserted during dialing.
.
/ ‘.,
L:.:. 1
I
26
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 JuIy 1990
0017#-(0
SMDR
Instructions
v1.0
or l)#
TIMER
- STARTING
TIME
DISPLAY
FOR OUTSIDE
CALLS
The start time for an outside caII appears on the display 15 seconds after the dial
signal is sent out. The 15-second default can be reset to 30 seconds.
The
start
time for -an incoming
calI appears on the display immediately
c~. is’
.answered..
-.
after the
O#: 15 seconds
l#: 30 seconds
OOlS#-(0
FLASH
or l)#
- REDIAL
[AUTOMATIC)
The REDIAL key can automaticall
cut off an outside line after one or more digits
have been dialed and then redial x e same numbers again.
However, if the system is connected to a PBX. re-program for No Automatic
FLASH or the PBX wi.U go into ON-HOLD status when the REDLAL key is pressed.
O#: No automatic
A I4..
0019#-(0,
OUTSIDE
FLASH
l-4)#
LINE
FLASH
TIMER
Sets the timer to temporariIy
REDLAL key.
O#: 0.5 second
l#: 1 second
2#: 1.5 seconds
3#: 2 seconds
4#: 3 seconds
- OFF-HOOK
(MANUAL)
release the outside line by pressing the FLASH
or
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Progra.mming Instructions
v1.0
0020#-(Owl-4)#
SSD STORED OUTSIDE LINE FbISH
Sets the timer to temporarily
TIMER
release the outside line by pressing the FLASH key.
O#: 0.5 second
l#: 1 second
2#: 1.5 seconds
3% 2 seconds
4#: 3 seconds
DIAL PAUSE TIMER - OUTSIDE LINE
After making an outside line call and hanging up there is a timed pause before
you can dial out to make a second call.
c-.’‘j
0#: 0.75 second
l#: 1 second
2#: 2 seconds
3#: 4 seconds
4#: 6 seconds
5#: 8 seconds
6#: 12 seconds
7#: 16 seconds
_--..------
0022#-(0.1~7)#
-
OUTSIDE LINE GUARD TIMER - INCOMING
MLLS
After answering an incoming call and hanging up there is a timed pause before
you can access another outside line.
O#: 0.75 second
l#: 1 second
2#: 2 seconds
3#: 4 seconds
4#: 6 seconds
5#: 8 seconds
6#: 12 seconds
7#: 16 seconds
__-- _---.- ____...--._------.~
28
-...._-
~_.
S-DBS [email protected]@ns~c&~~~~
V1.O
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
or 2)#
0023#-(0.1
PULSE
DIAL
MINIMUM
PAUSE
Sets a pause between digits dialed during.puIse
dialing.
0#: 640 ms
l#: 752 ms
0024#-m#
d
SWITCHING
TIME
FOR NIGHT
MODE
(AUTOMATIC)
You can set the system, so that it switches automaticaIIy
from day mode to night.
Enter the time using the 12-hour system followed by 1 for AM. or 2 for P.M.:
8:02.P.M. = 08022
12:00kM.= 12001
11:59kM.=11591
._
CONF #: Remains in dav mode
HHMMN#: AutomaticaIIy switches to night mode. 01-12 (HH). 00-59 (MM). 00-59
(SS), N=l (A.M.) or 2 (P.M.)
0025#-(0
or l]#
TRANSFER
ON-HOOK
(AUTOMATIC)
An incoming call can be transferred to another extension by entering the &ension number and replacing the receiver. The extension at the other end receives
an incoming call tone.
If automatic
transfer is not programmed,
on manual transfer.
700 for information
O#: On-Hook transfer disable
l#: On-Hook transfer enable
see Operating
Instructions,
Section
Secaori ‘4330
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Progr amming Instructions
v1.0
0026#-(0
or l)#
ONE-TOUCH
KEY
You can dial stored telephone numbers and SPD codes by pressing a single key if
the system is programmed for One-Touch Call.
0#: One-touch call not possible
l#: One-touch call
0027#-(0
or l)#
__ _..---....___ .
BACKGROUND
MUSIC
d
(BGM)
O#: BGM disabled
l#: BGM enabled
0628#-(O.l-3)#
INFORMATION
TONE
FOR VOICE
CALLING
or splash tone for extensions called by voice. The tone is
sounded for 0.5 second before the caller’s voice is heard.
Sets the information
O#: Tone for voice call and Darrine call
l#: Tone for voice call
2#: Tone for paging call
3#: No information tone
0029#-(0
CO SIGNAL
or l)#
- OFF-HOOK
- ALERT
TONE
An alert tone will sound to announce a second call.
O#: No alert tone
l#: Alert tone
30
.--_
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
0030#-(0
or l)#
STATION
LOCKOUT
Instnxtions
v1.0
ID CODE
Displays the ID code on an LCD telephone.
O#: ID code not disnlaved
l#: ID code displayed
0031#-(0
or l)#
SSD DISPLAY
RESTRICTION
(80-89)
4
Sets the system to display telephone numbers durin an SSD call and REDIAL. If
SSD calls are programmed not to display, then redi zf ed telephone numbers are
not displayed either.
O#: Number not disnlaved
l#: Number displayed
NOTE:
0032#-(0’
DATA
AUTO (00-79) SSD numbers are always displayed.
or I)#
SECURITY
Prohibits interrupting
0% Can interrupt
I#: Cannot intemrnt
conversations
or data transmissions.
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Prograxnmi.ng Instructions
v1.0
0033#-(0, P-7)#
EXTENSION HOLD RECALL TIMER
A recall warning tone sounds to indicate that an outside line ca.U has not been
answered within a specified time after being put on HOLD from an extension other
than the attendant’s nhone.
Set the hold recall timer at between 20-180 seconds.
O#: No recall
l#: Recall 20 seconds
2#: Recall 40 seconds
3#: Recall 60 seconds
_.----._ -__- ___---__ a
_-.-..-. -.
6#: Recall 150 seconds
7#: Recall 180 seconds
0034#-(0, I-?)#
TRANSFER
RECALL TIMER
If an outside line ca.U is not answered within a specified lime after being transferred. the call will revert back to the original extension.
Set the extension transfer recall timer at between 20-180 seconds.
O#:
I#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
No recall
Recall 20 seconds
Recall 40 seconds
Recall 60 seconds
Recall 90 seconds
Recall 120 seconds
Recall 150 seconds
Recall 180 seconds
32
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
Instruct+oln.
.
0035#-(0,1-5)#
SLT ON-HOOK
(AUTOMATIC)
DETECTION
TIMER
Set the line flash on an SLT to either Line FLASH or disconnect when the hook
button is pressed lon er or less than the time set for a Iine FLASH. (referred to as
the hooking operation.4
No Detection
Line
O#: No detection
l#: Less than 250ms
2#: Less than 250ms
3#: Less than 250ms
4#: Less than 250ms
5#: Less than 250ms
NOTE:
0036f-(0
250
250
250
250
250
Flash
-
500 ms
1000 ms
1500 ms
2000 ms
3000 ms
Disconnect
Over
Over
Over
Over
Over
500 ms
1000 ms
1500 ms
2000 ms
3000 ms
be set usin the POWER SETTING.
page 7 in this manu 3 for instructions.
Can only
See‘
or 1)#
SLT OUTSIDE
LINE
HOLD
An outside Line caU on your extension can be put on System Hold or Exclusive
Hold.
O#: Svstem hold
l#: Exclusive hold
0037#-(0
or l)#
SLT INTERCOM
CALL
RING PATTERN
O#: Internal rim? signal nattem
I#: Same as incoming ca.II signal
pattern
.
33
?
a-t
S-DBS Programming
v1.0
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
Instructions
‘;.. -..
0038#-(0, I-4)#
CPC SIGNAL
TIMER
- SLT EXTENSION
LINE
The CPC signal is a disconnect signal sent to the SLT.
O#: No signal
l#: 0.25 second
2#: 0.50 second
3#: 0.75 second
4#: 1 second
0039#-(0
DOOR
--
or l)#
BOX SPEECH
--
PATH
The 308 system has 2 analog speech paths and the 616 system has 4 analog
speech paths. One of these speech paths for each system can be set aside for the
door box only.
c !
O#: No door box sneech oath
l#: Door box speech path
0040#-(0
SENSOR
or 1)#
DETECTING
SIGNAL
O#: Detects a make sisal
l#: Detects a break signal
0041#-(0
or l)#
SENSOR
SIGNAL
ALARM
RING
STOP
O#: Sensor detectine sifznal stons the alarm ring
l#: Picking up the receiver stops the alarm ring
34
. ,.^
c-.I.;
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
0042#-(0
or l)#
MULTI-PURPOSE
RELAY 2 FUNCTION
O#: Multi-DurDose relav 2
l#: Incoming ring signal
0043#-(0
or l)#
MULTI-PURPOSE
--.--. ----I#
O#: Relav oDerated as Droprammed time
:’ Relay operate& continually
0044#-(0
,,’
RELAY 1 OPERATION
or l)#
MULTX-PURPOSE RELAY 2 OPEMTION
O#: Relav oDerated as DroErammed time
l#: Relay operated continually
MULTI-PURPOSE
O#:
.
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
RELAY 1 OPERATION TIMER
0.125 second
2
3
4
5
6
7
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
~--_.
Instnxtions
v1.0
S-DBS programming
v1.0
MULTI-PURPOSE
0%
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
Instructions
RELAY
2 OPERATION
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
:_
TIMER
0.125 second
1 second
2 seconds
3 seconds
4 seconds
5 seconds
6 seconds
7 seconds
.
36
-.
&&on-Qo&.--..
S-DBS Programming
.__
Issue 1 July 1990
PSD 2 EEY - TRUNK
SETTING
<(Outside line) address#-(data)#>
(W-06)
01#-(0 or l)#
DIALSIGNAL-OUTSIDELINE
O#: 10 DDS Dulse dial
l#: DTMF signal dial
(01-06) 02%(0, 1 or2)#
DTW
SIGNAL
SENDING
TAKE
O#: 80 ms ON/ 80 ms OFF
l#: 125 ms ON/125 ms OFF
/---
2#: 250 ms ON/150 ms OFF
(01-06)03#-(0
or l)#
CONTVECTEDPHONELINE
O#: CO line
l#: PBX line
(0146)
04#-(0 or l)#
PAUSEFUNCTIONFORPBXLINE(AUTOMATXC)
O#: No Dause
l#: Automatic pause
.::
._
Instructions
v1.0
S-DBS Programming
v1.0
(01-06)
DTMF
05#-(0
SIGNAL
Instructions
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
or l)#
CONVERSION
(AUTOMATIC)
The dial signal automatically converts to a DTMF signal within
pulse dialing. Pressing # or * is not required.
However. during incoming calls the dial signal automatically
without a 15-second intenral.
O#: Automatic
l#: Automatic
(01-06)
DTMF
__--.
06#-(0
SIGNAL
15 seconds after
converts immediately
conversion disable
conversion enable
or l)#
CONVERSION
(MANUAL)
Press # or * to convert the dial signal to a DTMF signal after pulse dialing.
_
-....
_-.__
O#: Conversion disable
l#: Conversion enable
(01-06)
DTMF
07%(0
SIGNAL
or l)#
SENDING
TIME
(AFTER
DIALING)
When ou change from pulse dialing to a DTMF signal during dialing the sending
time oYthe DTMF signal can also be changed.
O#: No change
l#: Changes length of the DTMF signal sending time
NOTE:
See Installation
information
h-tern
38
,
Instructions,
Section 300 for
on how to cut the jumper
__-- .- cable on ____-.--unit.
-,i
c
/- .
-
S-DBS Programming
.~_._.~.
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
(01-06)
DTMF
OS#-(0,
SIGNAL
Instructions
VI.0
1 or 2)#
SENDING
TIME
TABLE
(AFTER
DIALING)
O#: 160 ms
l#: 320 ms
2#:480 ms
NOTE:
(01-06)
OUTSIDE
09#-(0,
LINE
See also address (01-06) 07# on page 38.
1 or 2)#
DISCONNECT
The system automatically
,.---‘i
‘C_
d
CPC SIGNAL
DETECTION
cancels a CO line call if a disconnect signal is received.
O#: No detection of CPC sisal
l#: Detection only while on HOLD
2#: Detection anytime
(0146)
10#-fO,l-7)#
OUTSIDE LINE DISCONNECT
CPC DETECTING
TIMER
The disconnect timer can be set within a range of 48 ms to 704 ms.
-----.-
O#: More than
l#: More than
2#: More than
3#: More than
4#: More than
5#: More than
6#: More than
7#: More than
~--- -----
48 ms
96 ms
192 ms
304 ms
400 ms
496 ms
592 ms
704 ms
.-
S-DBS Programming
v1.0
(01-06)
ll#-(0
Instructions
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
or 1)#
--.POOLED-TRUNK
ACCESS
DIAL
9
When 9 is dialed there is an automatic
connection to a vacant line in the group.
O#: Not assigned to pooled trunk access dial 9
l#: Pooled trunk access dial 9
NOTE:
(01-06)
POOLED
Instructions,
Section 300 for
information on how to cut the jumper cable on
the Key System Unit.
*
See InstaIlation
12#-(CONF,
TRUNK
l-3)#
ACCESS
GROUP
When 81-83 is dialed there is an automatic connection to a vacant Iine in the
----.----.
u moup.
ki maxunum 01 three gK3pSii-biiXSk~h
th e system
m any
combination.
CONF: Not subiect to pooled trunk access group
l#:
Pooled trunk access group 81
.
Pooled trunk access group 82
g:
Pooled trunk access group 83
l.i#:
Pooled trunk access groups 81 and 82
1,2,3#:
Pooled trunk access groups 81.82 and 83
1. 3#:
Pooled trunk access groups 81 and 83
2, 3#:
Pooled trunk access groups 82 and 83
.
I’
\\
!
.’
S-DBS
Section 400
Issue 1 JuIy 1990
INCOMING
RING
TONE
Programming
Instructions
v1.0
PAT-TERN
The ring tone pattern can be changed for each trunk port.
o#: Synchronized incominq rinP tone
l#: 3 seconds ON/ 1 second OFF
2#: 2 seconds ON/2 seconds OFF
3#: 1 second ON/-l second OFF
4#: 1 second ON/3 seconds OFF
5#: 0.5 second ON/O.5 second OFF
6#: 0.5 second ON/O.5 second OFF,
0.5 second ON/2.5 seconds OFF
7#: 0.5 second ON/3.5 seconds OFF
8#: 1 second ON/7 seconds OFF
(01-06) 14#-(0.1~7)#
INCOMING
RING
SIGNAL
DETECTION
TIME
Detects an incoming ring signal when the signal is longer than the time
-programmed*
or an-incoming ring signal. -.-.--- -O#: More
l#: More
2#: More
3#: More
4#: More
5#: More
6#: More
7#: More
than
than
than
than
than
than
than
than
50 ms
100 ms
150 ms
200 ms
250 ms
300 ms
350 ms
400 ms
S-DBS Pro gramning
v1.0
(01-06)
Instnxtiotis
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
15#-(O,l-7)#
INCOMING
RING PATTERN
DETECTION
Becausei
TIMER
@ALring-patternssometimes-varyTthe-&zter-can-be-set
up to a
maximum of 14 seconds to ensure that the ring cycle on incoming calls is not cut
off prematurely.
O#: 3 seconds
l#: 4 seconds
2#: 5 seconds
3#: 6 seconds
4#: 8 seconds
5#: 10 seconds
6#: 12 seconds
7#: 14 seconds
(01-06)
16#-(O,l-3)#
EXTERNAL
RINGER
OPERATION
Use with multi-purpose
relay 2.
O#: Disable
l#: Day ringer
2#: Night ringer
3#: Day and night ringer
(01-06)
17#-(0
INCOMING
or l)#
CALL
FORWARDING
O#: Cannot accept caIl fomarding
I#: Call forwarding
S-DBS Frogramming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
(01-06)
DELAYED
v1.0
18#-(OJ-3)#
RING FUNCTION
...-(##..Drsablep-.
OPERATION
..-...
l#: Day delayed ring
2#: Night delayed rin
3#: Day and night dePayed ring
(01-06)
DELAYED
19#-(0,1-4)#
RING TRANSFERRING
O#: Disable
l#: After 15
2#: After 30
3#: After 45
4#: After 60
/
TIME
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
-.
I
DELAYED
RING
Instructions
TRANSFER
CONE Clear
(lo-25)#: Extension numbers
TO EXTENSION
NUMBERS
S-DBS Programmin g Instructions
v1.0
PSI) 3 KEY - EXTENSION
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
SETTING
<(Extension number) address#-(data)#>
(10-25)
Ol#-(CONF,
DAY INCOMING
l-6)#
RING
SETTING
Sets the ring assignment in the day mode on a per line per extension basis.
CONF: Clear 112-251
1% TYu.nk 1
2#: Trunk 2
3#: Trunk 3
4#: Trunk 4
5#: Trunk 5
6#: lYu.nk 6
NOTE:
(10-25)
Runks l-6 are the default settings for the
attendant’s phone.
02#-(CONF,1-6)#
Sets the ring assignment
in night mode on a per line per extension basis.
CONF: Clear (12-251
l#:mJnk
1
2#:mlnk2
3#:Trunk3
4#:nunk4
5#: nunk
6#:mmk6
5
NOTE:
44
Trunks l-6 are the default settings for the
attendant’s phone.
:
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
Instructions
v1.0
(10-25) 03#-(0.1 or 2)#
ANSWERINGCALLS(AUTOBXATIC)
Incoming calls assigned to ring can be answered in the order received by simply
picking up the receiver.
O#: No DickuD
l#: Receiver only
2#: Receiver and ON/OFF key
(10-25) 04#-(OJ-3)#
CALLWAITING
4
A busy tone is sent from one extension to another if the called extension is on
another call.
0#:
I#:
2#:
3#:
Cannot
Accepts
AcceDts
AcceDts
accept call waiting
outside calls
internal calls 112-&j)
outside and internal calls [attendant-ext.
(10-25) 05#-(CONFJ-3)#
PAGING GROUPS
Sets an extension for paging groups 1.2 or 3.
CONF: Clear
l#: Paging group 1
2#: Paging group 2
3#: Paging group 3
(lo-25)06#-(0
or l)#
SENSOR ALARMRING
O#: No rine (12-251
l#: Rine (attendant-ext.
10.111
10.11)
S-DBS Programming
v1.0
(10-25) 07#-(OJ-3)#
Instructions
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
(.-1
DOOR BOX CALLS
Sets an extension to receive door box calls.
O#: No door box calls (12-25)
l#: Door box A calls only
2#: Door box B calls only
3#: Door box A and B calls (attendant-ext.
..._ ..----. - .
(10-25)
08#-(0
10.11)
or 1)#
CALL DURATION
DISPLAY
Displays conversation
time on an LCD teiephone.
O#: Time not displayed
l#: Time disnlaved
(10-25)
09#-(0
or I)#
BUSY OVERRIDE
Allows an extension to override a busy port.
D#: Bum override imuossibie
l#: Busy override possible
(10-25)
lO#-(0
or l)#
BUSY OVERRIDE
REJECTION
Busy override is not possible when an extension is set for rejecting it.
0#: Busy override rejected
I#: Busv override accented
NOTE:
Conference calls cannot be interrupted.
.
c..‘j
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
(10-25) ll#-(0 or l)#
Instructions
VI-O-
DATA SECURITY
O#: Disable
l#: Enable
(10-25) 12%(0 or ll#
VOICE ANNOUNCE OFF-HOOK (MANUAL)
O#: Reiection
l#: Acceptance
(10-25) 13#-(0 or I)#
HYBRID SYSTEM/DUAL
PORT OPERATION
Connect either the key telephone or SLT to a port for Hybrid operation. For Dual
Port operation both the key telephone and the SLT must be connected to the same
port.
O#: Hvbrid oDeration
l#: Dual port operation
-___--
--- ~. -.--
NOTE:
Can only be set usin the POWER S&TTING.
page 7 in this manu 9 for instructions.
See
(10-25) 14#-(0 or l)#
KEY TELEPHONE
EXTENSION LOCKOUT IN MGHT MODE
.
O#: Functioning
l#: Locked out
.
-~.--.-
47
S-DBS Programming
- v1.0
(10-25)
15#-(0
SLT OUTSDDE
Instructions
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
or l)#
LINE
DIAL
O#: Pulse
l#: DTMT siQnal
(lo-251
16#-(0
HEADSET
or l)#
MODE
--._-
O#: Not connected
l#: Connected
(10-25)
17#-(0
DIALTONE
DISABLE
O#: Disable
l#: Enable
._-. .--_-__--48
--
or l)#
_-
-...
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Programming
Instructions
VI.0
PSD 4 KEY - FF KEY ASSIGNMENT
<Address+(data)HOLD>
0002#-(4-digit
number)HOLD
coLmE2
Sets trunk port number 2 for the FF key for every telephone and DSS.
C.OW:-Clear--.
___.
@-digit number)HOLD
0003#-(4-digit
CO Line
number)HOLD
3
Sets trunk port number 3 for the FF key for every telephone and DSS.
CONE Clear
(4-digit number)HOLD
0004#-(Pdigit
number)HOLD
COLrNE4
COW: Clear
(4-digit number)HOLD
0005#[email protected]
number)HOLD
COLine5
Sets trunk port number
*.’
..
CONF: Clear
(4digit number)HOLD
5 for the F’F key for every telephone and DSS.
.
S-DBS Programming Instructions
VI.0
0006#-(&digit
number)HOLD
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
COLINE6
Sets trunk port number 6 for the FYI?key for every telephone and DSS.
CONF: Clear
(4-digit number)HOLD
NOTE:
--.--
.--.----
The F’F Ke are a system-wide setting.
assigned x e same code: see page 17.
.-
Every telephone is
c %.
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
~e&&w-iwL
bstrWpIn;
.
RESTRICTIONS
<Address#-(data)#>
OOOl#-(0
or l)#
SYSTEM INSTALIdiTION
Se&..ew;~.y
AREA CODE
it is necessary to dial 1 before an area code when making long dis.
O#: Area code onlv<
l#: 1 + area code
0002#-(0
PBX
or l)#
INTERNAL
CALL RESTRICTION
_O#: PBX intercom calls prohibited
l#: PBX intercom calls
OOOS#-(Oor l)#
PBX
INCOMING
CALL RESTRICTION
O#: PBX incoming calls prohibited
l#: PBX incoming calls
0004#-(0
MAXIMUM
or 7-32)#
NUMBER
OF DIGITS
DIALED
Sets the mazdmum number of digits dialed from an extension.
O#: Dial anv number of digits
7#-32#: Dial signal restricted after 7th-32nd digit
.
S-DBS Programming
&s?%-(0.1
Instructions
Section 400
Issue 1July 1990
or 2)#
DIALlNG
RESTRICTION
DURING
INCOMING
CALLS
Dial signal can not be sent to outside lines.
O#: Dialing during incoming calls not restricted
l#: Pro ammed TRS type restrictions
2#: Di afti* g during conversation restricted
OOOS#-(0 or l)#
#
AND
l
KEYS
DIAL
RESTRICTION
O#: Not restricted
I#: Restricted
0007#-(0
or l)#
STATION
LOCKOUT
TYPE
1
An extension can answer incoming calls, but cannot place outgoing calls.
OOOS#-(O,l-9)#
PBX DIAL
Determines
1
dialing when there are TRS call restrictions.
O#: No diQits dialed
52
:I/L
--
Section 400
&b16%lff;‘E~%go
PBX DLAL 2
O#:
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
No dipits dialed
1 ( .igit
2 ( .igits
3 ( .igits
4 ( igits
5 ( 5gits
6 ( @its
7 ( ligits
8 t iigits
9 ( iigits
OOlO#-(O,l-9)#
PBX DIAL
diGits dialed
g$y.
2#I
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
c
(
(
(
(
(
t
(
OOll#-(OJ-9)#
PBXDIAL4
-----
W:
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
No- dWits--dialed1 digit
2 digits
3 di&s
4 digits
5 digits
6 digits
7 digits
8 digits
9 digits
__-.
S-DBS Programming
kWruc~ln~
.
.------
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS FYogramming Instructions
jJ&&#-(O* 1;-9)#
-PBX DIAL
5
O#: No digits dialed
l#: 1 digit
2#: 2 digits
3#: 3 digits
4#: 4 digits
5#: 5 digits
6#: 6 digits
7#: 7 digits
8#: 8 digits
9#: 9 digits
0013#-(OJ-9)#
PBXDIAL6
O#:
1%
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
.__---_
No digits dialed
1 digit
2 di&s
3 digits
4 digits
5 digits
6 digits
7 digits
8 digits
9 digits
0014#-(OJ-9)#
PBXDIAL7
g+j
..
2#: 2
3#: 3
4k4f
5#: 5
6#: 6
7#: 7
. 8#: 8
9#: 9
&its
igit
( ligits
( 3gits
ligits
( ugits
( UPS
( iigits
( ligits
( iigits
dialed
-----_
-. -.-..-
II’---
S-DBS Programming
PBXDIALS
0#:
l#:
2#:
3#:
4#:
5#:
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
No dipits dialed
1 digit
2 digits
3 digits
4 digits
5 digits
6 digits
7 digits
8 digits
9 digits
0016#-(OJ-9)#
-------
!/*-
PBXDIAL9
~_- ._--__..- -.-...-.
O#: No digits dialed
l#: 1 digit
2#: 2 digits
3X: 3 digits
44: 4 digits
5#: 5 digits
6#: 6 digits
7#: 7 digits
8#: 8 digits
9#: 9 digits
0017#-(OJ-9)#
PBXDIALO
Q#Vd
,,y-‘,
l#: 1 digit
2#: 2 digits
3#: 3 digits
4#: 4 digits
5#: 5 digits
6#: 6 digits
7#: 7 digits
8#: 8 digits
9#: 9 digits
~.---.
.-.
h&.ructions
v1.0
S-DBS Programming
Instructions
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
GM3 #-(00-89)#
SSD TOLL
_-.--
RESTRICTIONS
(’
_.__ __._
--.-. ------. .-
.
OVERRIDE
Calls from specified SSD numbers
restriction Types O-3.
are not restricted even on telephones set for toll
(00-89)#: Calls can be made by SSD code 00-89 despite restrictions.
AREA
AND OFFICE
CODE
TABLES
- MAJOR
ACCESS
LEVELS
Type 0:
Cannot place or receive outside calls. Only intercom
calls are p’ossible.
Type
Ftikrt
1:
place outside caIls, but can receive inccging
.
Type
2:
Can make onIy local calIs and programmed special area code
table 1 caIIs and l-800 or 800 calls. Cannot make 411,555
or 976 calls.
Type
3:
Can make onI local calls and programmed
table 1 and ta 2:le 2 calls.
Type
4:
No restrictions.
Table
1 Cancelling 6-digit restriction
OlOl-0116%(maximum
Table
0201-0216#-(m-urn
56
for Types 2 and 3
6-digit numbers)#.
2 CanceIling 6-digit restriction
special area code
for Type 3.
6-digit numbers)#.
C_.,;
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
o Restrictions
%%?fOh%@-8?
in PSD 5 can be copied
Instructions
v1.0
fkom port to port.
-- _-
<(EX)Addfess#-(data)++>--
(10-25)
01#-(0
STATION
or l)#
LOCKOUT
CAPABILITY
Restricts outside line calls on an unattended
telephone.
O#: Disabled
1#: Enabled
(10-25)
02#-(0
SSD TOLL
or l)#
RESTRICTIONS
CANCELLED
0#: SSD number restricted
l#: SSD number not restricted
(10-25) 03#-(OJ-4)#
DAY RESTRICTION
O#: [email protected]
TYPES
- TRUNK
1
TYPES
- TRUNK
2
0
l#: TVpe 1
2#:Type2
3#:Type3
4#:TvDe4
(lo-25)04#-(OJ-4)#
DAY RESTRICTION
O#: Type 0
l#: Type 1
2#:Type2
3#:Type3
4#:Tvpe4
.
57
Iii.
),j
B
S-DBS Programming Instructions
&k&5)
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
05#-(O,l-4)#
DAY RESTRICTION
TYPES
,,r-. .
I
- TRTJNE 3
O#: Type 0
l#:Type 1
2#:Type2
z: .. E" e43
(lo-25)06#-(0,1-4)#
DAYRESTRICTIONTYPES-TRUNK4
O#: Type 0
l#: Type 1
2#:Type2
3#:Qpe3
4#:Tvw4
(10-25)-.-. 07#-(0.1:4)#
--.
DAY RESTRICTION
TYPES
- TRUNK
5
O#: Type 0
l#:Type 1
2#:Type2
ii: .. %: 43
(10-25) OS+(0,1-4)#
DAYRESTRICTIONTYPES-TRUNK6
O#: Type 0
l#: Qpe 1
Z&Type2
__-___----_._--
___-----
.
(. :
S-DBS Programming
NIGHTRESTRICTIONTYPES-TRUNB:l
___----
0#: Type 0
l#: Type 1
2#:Type2
3#:Type3
4#:Tvne4
(10-25) lO#-(OJ-4)#
NIGHT RESTRICTION
TYPES - TRUNK 2
O#: Type 0
l#: Type 1
2#:Type2
3#:Type3
4#:TvDe4
.’
.!’
(10-25) li#-(0,1-4)#
NIGEIT RESTRICTION
TYPES - TRUNlK 3
0#: Type 0
l#: Type 1
2kType2
3#:Type3
4#:TvDe4
(10-25) 12#-(0,1-4)#
NIGHT RESTRICTION
0#: Qpe 0
l#: Type 1
2kType2
3#:Type3
4#: nTDe 4.--..-
!
..
TYPES - TRUNK 4
hstructions
v1.0
S-DBS Programming
Instructions
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
WA - 5) 13# (0,1-4)#
NIGHT
RESTRICTION
TYPES
- TRUNK
5
TYPES
- TRUNK
6
..’
Ok Type 0
I#: Type 1
2#: Type 2
___~- 3&Type..3-. _ -. .._
4#: Tme 4
(10-25)
14#-(0,1-4)#
NIGHT
RESTRICTION
a
Ok Type 0
l#: Type 1
%: Type 2
3#: Type 3
4#: TvDe 4
i \._. ;
.
i
\
60
i
a4:.
f
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
i%t%%d?-~
SETTING
cAddress+ (data) #>
OlOl#-(0
SMDR
or l)#
PRINTING
MODE
1
O#: prints outf!oinP calls onlv
l#: Fkints incoming/outgoing
calls
0102#-(0
SMDR
or l)#
PRINTlNG
MODE
2
O#: Prints data only
l#: Prints titles and data
d103#-(0
DATA
--_-
-...
or l)#
TRANSMISSION
-. .--
~-__...
O#: 4800 bps
I#: 1200 bDs
0104#-(0
or l)#
STOP BIT LENGTH
O#: 1 bit
l#: 2 bits
SPEED/BAUD
RATE
Instructions
v1.0
S-DBS Programming
v1.0
0105#-(0
DATA
Instructions
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
or l)#
:c
I
LENGTH
O#: 7 bits
l#: 8 bits
_~___._..._..
_ .._.. .- .--_.----_---..-..
Bos#-(0
. . -.
or l)#
PARITY
CHECK
Checks for errors during printing by aligning data protocol specifications
between the S-DBS and the SMDR printer or when caxqing out on-site
maintenance through the RS-232-C connector. The sent data is totaled and
the resulting odd/even value is referred to as a parity check.
check
l#: Parity check
O#:No~aritv
0107#-(0
EVEN/ODD
NUMBER
O#: Odd number parity
l#: &en number ~ariQ
62
ci
or l)#
PARITY
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
Index
Day
Incoming Ring Setting
Restia,‘1”5”7”
A
# and * Keys Dial Restriction
Answering Calls (Automatic)
~._Autom~tic.Pause--_-
52
45
-Tnlnk2
57
:g-ggi
55;
Instructions
v1.0
44
..---. 1-E:
gg
Da s of the Week 22
De f ayed Ring
Function Operation
43
Transfer to Extension Numbers
43
Transferring Time 43
Dial
Pause Timer - Outside Line 28
Signal - Outside Line 37
Tone Disable -48
Dial.inCg$Fy2tion
during Incoming
- Dial0
26
- Dial 1 23
- Dial2
23
- Dial3
24
- Dial4
24
-Dial 5 24
-Dial 6 25
- Dial7
25
- Dial8
25
- Dial9
26
‘IIx-ner 26
Door Box
Calls 46
Speech Path 34
DTMF Signal
Conversion (Automatic)
38
Conversion (Manual)
38
Sending Time
37.38
Sending Time Table 39
B
Background Music (BGM)
Busy Override
46
Rejection
46
30
C
Du&&~Qpe&r&~--4~
AC
‘fv
callwaiting
45- COLine2
49
COLine3
49
COLdne4
49
COLine5
49
COLine6
50
CO Signal - Off-Hook - Alert Tone
Connected Phone Line 37
CPC Signal Timer - SLT Port
3
E
Even/Odd Number Parity
62
Extension HOLD Recall Timer
32
External Ringer Operation
42
30
D
Data
Length
62
securi~
31.47
Transmission Speed/Baud Rate
Date 21
_. .~
61
F
FF Key
-COUne2
-COUne3
-COLine4
-COUne5
-COUne6
FLASH REDIAL
17
17
17
17
17
(Automatic)
27
.
G H
Headset Mode 48
Hybrid System/Dual
Port Operation
47
I
S-DBS Progranuning Instructions
v1.0
Section 400
Issue 1 JuIy 1990
Incoming
Call Forwarding
42
Ring Pattern Detection Timer
42
Ring Signal Detection Time 41
Ring Tone Pattern
41
Information Tone for Voice CaIIing
30
K
Key Telephone Extension Lockout in
Night Mode 47
Maximum Number of Digits Dialed
Multi-Purpose
Relay lOperation
35
Operation Timer
35
Relay 2
Function
35
Operation
35
Operation Timer
3
51
Paging Groups
45
Parity Check
62
Pause Function for PBX Line
matic)
37
PBX
Dial 0 55
Dial 1 52
Dial 2 53
DiaI 3 53
Dial 4 53
Dial 5 54
Dial 6 54
Dial 7 54 Dial8
55
Dial9
55
Incoming Call Restriction
Internal CaII Restriction
Pooled Trunk Access
Dial 9 40
Group
40
P&e DiaI Minimum Pause
Sensor
:ggg
gg
-Tnlnk4
1g.g;
59.
g
AlarmRin
44
29
34
SLT
Intercom Call Ring Pattern
On-Hook Detection Timer
Outside Line Dial
48
33
33
Outside Une HOLD
33
SMDR
Printing
Mode 1 61
Mode2
61
Timer - StarUng Time Display for
39
Signal Detection 39
FLASH Timer - Off-Hook (Manual)
27
Guard Timer - Incoming Cab 28
Setting 22
&l
51
51
45
Detecting i5ignal
35
Signal Alarm Ring Stop
0
One-Touch Key 30
Outside Line
Disconnect CPC
Detecting Timer
(Auto-
S
N
Night Incoming Ring Setting
Night Restriction Types
-Trunk159
/
Outside Calls 27
SSD
Display Restriction (80-89) 31
Stored Outside Line FLASH Timer 28
Toll Restrictions Cancelled 57
Toll Restrictions Override 56
,
__ _._. ---_-.
..-.- __ ._.-.-.__--.-..--
--. .- ..-
i
1
I\
4
‘s
S-DBS Programming
Section 400
Issue 1 July 1990
Station Lockout
Capability
57
ID Code 31
Qpe 1 52
61
Stop Bit Length
Switching Time for Night Mode
(Automatic)
29
System Installation Area Code
51
T, U
Time 21
Dis lay 21
Thns Fer
On-Hook (Automatic)
Recall Timer
32
29
V
Voice Announce Off-Hook (Manual)
47
Instructions
v1.0
=====a=
--------a
B’BUB u u-b
Digital Business System
Proaramming Guidance Manual
Panasonic DBS Small
For Models:
VB4303
SECTION 309
issue 1, January 1990
Digital Business System
Notification
to your local telephone
Before connecting
or disconnecting,
company
inform the following
COL 2:
COL 5:
COL a:
CJLl 1 :
COL14:
COL17:
COL20:
COL23:
COL26:
COL29:
COL32:
COL35:
COL38:
COL41:
COL44:
COL47:
COLSO:
COL53:
COL56:
co1 59..
L62:
to the telephone
(
I
)
;
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
1
1
)
1
)
1
1
1
1
)
1
(
(
(
(
1
1
1
1
1
)
)
Model numbers . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . ..-......~....-*.....*.....-..............-..”--“.
FCC registration number for . . . . . . . . . . . ..“....I................................”.
Note. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-...................-....................
l
Check
that the FCC registration
listed above.
No. on the nameplate
co1 3:
COL 6:
COL 9:
COLl2:
CQI 15:
COLl8:
COL21:
coL24:
w 27:
CQI mCOL33:
COL36:
w 39:
COL42:
COL45:
COL48:
COL51:
COL54:
COL57:
COL60:
COL63:
(
(
(
(
(
I
1
(
I
1
1
1
1
1
)
1
1
1
I
(
(
(
(
,’
)
1
1
1
1
1
1
(
(
(
(
(
1
1
Panasonic: VB-4303W4305W43060
ACK4A4-60499KF-E
ACK4A4-60469-W
on the side panel of the main cabinet is the same as the number
Ringer equivalence ... ..-...........-.---..-.-..~.~........-...-....-.
Service order code ................. ..-............-....“.....-.....”....-.....~
...
Network address signaling code “-....-......-.....I.....“..............
.
Facility interface code .... ..-....._...........“..................”.”..~........-.
Required network interface code ........... . ..... .I..................“.... . .
Note 1:
company:
0.58
9.oF
E
02LS2
RJP?X
When enabling automatic line selection to use, contact the telephone installer or a Panasonic service center.
In this case, please inform your telephone company of FCC Registration number e.
The FCC registration number Is found on the key service unit.
According to FCC rules, this function is regarded as one of the distinguishing features of a PBX as opposed to a
key telephone system.
Direct connection to a Party-line or Coin+perated
telephone line Is prohibited. If you are on a party line, check with your
local telephone company. To assure the sate use of your telephone, please observe the following gulde lines for Installation
and use.
This product is an electrical device and can be hazardous If Immersed in water. To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not
use this unit while in the bathtub, shower, or when wet. If you accidentally drop the unit into water, unplug it first, then retrieve
it by pulling it out by the cord.
Do not use the telephone near the sources of electric ‘noise’ such as fluorescent lumps, air conditioner, washing machine, TV
sets or radios.
The telephone should not be exposed to heat sources, direct sunlight, extreme temperatures, moisture, strong vibrations,
greasy or dusty environments.
Never clean the telephone with benzene, paint thinner or other solvenls.
Do not change the unit Installation location without consulting the dealer or installer.
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
3.0)
Program
DBS
Outline
Chapter 1 Program Outline
I - 1 Order of Program Setting
Setthe
program
according
to the following
procedure.
Step:1
Be sure you understand
functions and working of the program asdescribed in this manual and the
operating instruction.
Step:2
Prepare
the program setting data table to comply with the users requirements.
Step:3
Confirm
the makeup
and prepare LCD telephone
of the system to be installed
for program setting.
1
Step:4
Reset the system to the initial
status and set the programming
data.
Step:5
Call back-be
program
number
on the LCD of the telephone
and confirm
the contents to be set
the program
setting.
1
Step:6
Correct
the setting
and confirm
the change,
then
complete
1-2 Structure and Working of Program
FFl. System setting
Setting the basic operations for the system
FF2. Trunk setting
Specification setting for each outside line port
FF3. Extension setting
Specification setting for each extension port
FF4. Incoming ring
Assigning outside line calls to each extension
FF5. FF key assignment
&signing outside lines to each extension FF key
FF6. Name storing
Storing the names and absence messages for
the extension
and SSD
FF7. Toll restriction
Setting the outside line calls from extension
FF8. LCR mode
Setting the lowest cost outside line
FF% Copy mode
The program for this system comprises the
following
10 modes (FFl - IO), each of which in
the 10 respective FF keys (Flexible Function Keys:
see Fig. 2 - 4).
At the time of setting the FF keys, whose
functions it is required to change are pressed,
and after entering the program mode as shown
in the diagram below the address numbers are
input and the da& is set
The diagram below illustrates the reciprocal
relationships
between the program
modes.
Copying
the TRUNK,EXT
FFlO. Spd number setting
Setting SSD number
-l-
setting
to another
and PSD number
port
DBS
Programming
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January
1990
Method
Chapter2
Programming
2 - 1 Preparing
Before
Method
Programming
setting
a program,
schedule is prepared.
questionnaire
(found
programming
table)
Data Table
the data
Hand the
in the Section
about the
Cautions when Preparing
Data Table
A Keep the trunk lines, extensions and
connected
equipment
not being used in the
initial set status without
including
them in
450
programming
specifications
for the
telephone
to the customer and enter the
necessary functions
and installation
specifications
in the programming
table
based on the details
recorded
the programming.
B. Be sure to record
the fact every time changes
are made to the programming
data table.
This will be necessary in the future for
maintenance
pur- poses and when extra
therein.
telephones
and outside
lines are added.
C The functions
of those items marked by ** in
the setting data table cannot be set or
changed during operation.
Do the
programming
when the functions
are no
longer being used.
71
4
Address
1 Featurename_]
No.
4
Feature
Setting data number
and initial data
v
Option selected
Fig, 2 - 1 Example
of Section
-2-
Relate program
number
v
Related setting
*
Setting
450 Programming
data
Table
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
.DBS
Method
3.0)
Programming
2 - 2 System Necessary for Program
Programming
is performed
from
an attendant’s
Setting from general
When programming
display telephone.
An attendant’s
telephone
is
one connected
to extension
port No. I or No. 2.
In addition,
programming
is also possible from
another
extension
of a programed
ID
code for programming.
While programming
possible in some cases while the system is
is
functioning,
allow forthis
by means
during use. Refer
about programs
which
setting
cannot
be set. When
telephone
connected
of the main cabinet,
diagram below.
from
to the test terminal
do so with reference
Setting from attendant’s
telephone
(Extension
port number
1 or 2)
For entering
the programming
mode,
3 PROG -+ RR is input
telephone.
from
‘jL’
other
Cautions
A After
main
EM/24
when programming
having set 5SS and EiUl24, turn off the
power source or unplug the 5% or
once. If this is not done, 5S.S and
EM124 will not operate.
If ihe setting for the paging
B.
a
changedduring
be answered.
(CN3)
to the
C
group
is
a page call, this call cannot
When a telephone
is not connected
to
extension port 2 and extension
number
70 I,
the system is in the nighttime
mode after
commencing
the programming
from the
attendant’s
telephone.
So, after the setting
manually,
put it into the daytime mode.
ON/OFF
the attendant’s
5.
The name setting can only be programmed
f-am the attendant’s
telephone.
Port 7
r
1
I
Test (Program)
Telephone
Main
Fig. 2-2
P-G”
than the attendant’s,
ON/OFF + 898 3 f4;9d449
digit code number) 3 PROG + ## is input
in others the program
may not
when, for example, extension
numbers cannot be changed
to the separate explanation
telephone
f&j<
from a telephone
Cabinet
Ten terminal
-3-
1
I
DSy72 console
name program
I
for
DBS
Programming
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January
1990
Method
2 - 3 Initial Set
Before setting when programming
for the first time,
be sure to initialize
the RAM data for the CPC card
forthe
main cabinet.
The operation
1.
2:
*
3.
4.
is as follows.
With the power for the main cabinet turned off,
clear the CPC BAM switch.
Turn on the power for the main cabinet
After
flickering
for about 10 seconds, the CFC lamp
goes off.
Put the CPC RAM switch to HOLD.
The LED lamp flickers and system mode
to the initial
This operation
the next
is not necessary
when
programming
time.
Note that if this operation
programming,
is repeated
all the data programmed
erased.
is reset
status.
Main
Cabinet
ISW1i$ q
Set’SWl’to
CN3
I
TEST side
!
CPC Card
\
RAM Hold Switch
Main Switch
I
Fig. 2-3
Initial
set for main cabinet
-4-
for each
up until
be
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
2-4
DBS
3.0)
Programming
Explanation about Keys Used for
Programmihg
The keys used when programming
operations
are as shown below.
Note :
Method
Changing
the input mode from numerical
to alphabetical
with the CONF key,
together
with back spacing with the AUTO
key and the alphabeticai
data of each 10
and their
key are only effective
below.
In cases other
letters
in the cases stated
that these the numbers
are input
from
the DSS console.
and
(DSS
172)
II
L/-I b
\ . &e
SSD name input
EXT name input
f
v
PGM start
DATA CLR
i!;ct;,
4 1
+
mode
mode
ON/OFF -+ PROG -+ # -3
ON/OFF -+ PROG -+ # -+
Return
to Previpus
VOLI
CONF
PROG
MUTE
... ..‘.‘......)
:.F..:.:.,.: ,....A
. . ..:.:...~.:.::::::~::i::::.
..~::~~~~~~~~~;~~~~~~
Mode
VOIA
l ‘&# DATA
.
.
Pause DATA
1.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . ..-...-..-.
i To store DATA i
; and toNEXT
;
Address
:
:...........--...-.-....--..
Fig. 2-4 Structure
-5-
of PGM Keys
1
2
DBS
Programming
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January
Method
2 - 5. Programming Method
While programming
be sure to confirm the details on the telephone
* ( 1’ in the table indicates the name of the key being used.
Ooeration
1.
contents
display.
LCD contents
The current date is set from extension
number 100.
Press [ON/OFF] key
Current date and time
display is deleted
‘F’ is displayed
Press [PROCI key
‘Ffr
is displayed
Press [#I key
Press [#I key
“Program
Mode
MAIN
MODE-
iS
displayed
Now in program
2.
The FF key corresponding
Press [FFll
mode
to the necessary
“system program
SELECT SUB MODE’
Now in system program
3.
The group number
. Press [l] key
Press [#I key
function
iS
displayed
mode
corresponding
to the necessary
: 1. is displayed
‘SELECTTIME
MODE
1:OATE
is input.
2:TIME’
function
iS
displayed
“DATE SET MODE
Press [I #1 key
MONTHIDAYIYEAR
Now in date set mode
4.
The setting values are input
Press month MM
‘MM’
is displayed
‘MMDD’
is displayed
Press date DD
‘MMDDYY’
is displayed
Press year YY
Press [#I key
Next address is displayed
The date input
5.
The setting
with
values
Press [ON/OFF]
the [#I key is registered.
are completed.
key
input
date
is displayed
-6
is input
3.0)
1990
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
2 - 6 Initial
Set Data Table
Address Number
.
DSS
Initial data set table
l-l-l ...............
l-l-2 ...............
1-2-l-l .............
1-2-1-2 .............
1-2-1-3 ..............
1-2-1-4 .............
1-2-1-s .............
1-2-1-S .............
1-2-1-7 .............
1-2-1-8 .............
l-2:1-9 .............
; 1-2-l-10 ............
\ 1-2-1-11 ............
1-2-1-12 ............
1-2-l-13 ............
1-2-1-14 ............
1-2-1-15 ............
1-2-1-16 ............
1-2-1-17 ............
1-2-1-18 ............
1-2-t-19 ............
1-2-l-20 ............
1-2-l-21 ............
1-2-2-1 .............
l-2-2-2 .............
l-2-2-3 .............
l-2-2-4 .............
l-2-2-5 .............
1-2-2-S .............
. l-2-2-7 .............
l-2-2-8 .............
1-2-2-g .............
1-2-3-1 ..............
l-2-3-2 ..............
l-2-3-3 .............
l-2-3-4 .............
l-2-3-5 .............
1-2-3-S .............
l-2-3-7 .............
l-2-3-8 .............
1-2-3-9 .............
l-2-3-l 0 ............
l-2-3-1 1 ............
1-2-3-12 ............
l-2-3-1 3 ............
1-2-3-14 ............
I-2-3-15 ............
1-2-3-16 ............
l-2-3-17 ............
1-2-3-18 ............
l-2-4-1 .............
Function
Initial
DATE SETMODE ..............
TIME SETMODE ...............
CALL DURATION ..............
SMDRTlMER30/16
............
LCR FUNCTION ..... ;. ...........
OVERRIDE TR5 ................
DENY SPD- DIAL ..............
AUTO FL&H CONT. ...........
ONE-TOUCH DIAL ............
ON-HOOK TRANSFER ..........
KEY BANK HOLD ..............
NON-AP.HOLDMODE
........
SLT FLASH CONT. ..............
DIGITOF EXT.# ...............
ALT. ATT MODE ...............
ATT CALL MODE ..............
EXTCALLMODE ...............
SPTONV-CALL
...............
5PT ON OVERRIDE .............
SYSTEM LOCATION ............
SSD DISP MODE ...............
API card assignment ...........
VOICE MAILTONE .............
TTY PARITY ...................
TTY PARITY MODE ............
TIYBAUDRATE
...............
TTYSTOPBIT ..................
I-iY DATA LENGTH ............
SMDR OUT/lNCQME ...........
SMDR LONG/LOCAL ...........
SMDR TITLE CONT .............
TTyXON/XOFF- ...............
PBXDlALl ....................
PBXDlAL2 ....................
PBX DIAL3 ....................
PBXDlAL4’....................
PBX DIALS ....................
PBX DIALS ....................
PBX DIAL7 ....................
PBX DIALS ....................
PAUSE POSlTlON 1 .............
PAUSEPOSITION 2 .............
PAUSEPOSITION 3 ............
PAUSE POSITION 4 .............
PAUSE POSITION 5 .............
PAUSE POSITION 6 .............
PAUSE POSITION 7 .............
PAUSE POSITION 8 .............
PAUSE POSITION 9 .............
PAUSE POSITION 0 .............
RING PAT-TERN ................
JAN.1.1989 ............................
12:oo .................................
Time displayed ........................
Starting from 16 sec. ...................
Pooled trunk accesscall ..................
Toll restriction type 2 . 6 ................
Displayed .............................
Auto flash .............................
One . touch call possible ................
On-hook transfer possible ..............
No automatic hold .....................
System hold ...........................
Hold release ...........................
3 digits ................................
Alternate mode ........................
Voice call ..............................
Voice call ..............................
Information tone sound ................
No sound .............................
1 + Area ..............................
1 SSDname on 1 large display line .......
(PC45 only. Read PCA5 manuals) .........
Internal busy tone .....................
No parity check ........................
Even Parity ............................
12OObps ...............................
lbit
..................................
Bbits ..................................
..........
Printing for income/outgoing
Local call and long distance call ..........
Without titles .........................
No control
............................
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
No auto pause .........................
No auto pause .........................
No auto pause .........................
No auto pause .........................
No auto pause .........................
No auto pause .........................
No auto pause .........................
No auto pause .........................
No auto pause .........................
No auto pause .........................
CM (1 sec. on/3sec.off) 8M (3sec, onllsecoff)
-,-7
&
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
DBS
Initial
data settabie
Address
l-2-4-2
l-243
l-244
l-245
l-24-6
l-247
l-24-8
l-2-4-9
l-3-1
l-3-2
l-3-3
l-3-4
l-3-5
l-3-6
&‘\
I
Number
.............
.............
.............
.............
.............
.............
.............
.............
...............
...............
...............
...............
...............
...............
::z
:::::::::::::::
l-3-9 ...............
l-3-10 ..............
l-3-1 1 ..............
l-3-12 ..............
1-3-13 ..............
1-3-14 ..............
l-3-15 ..............
l-3-16 ..............
l-3-17 ..............
1-3-18 ..............
l-3-19 ..............
l-4 ................
l-5
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January
................
l-6-l#
.............
l-6-2# .............
l-7 ................
2-( l-32)-1
2-(l-32)-2
2-( l-32)-3
2-( l-32)-4
2-( l-32)-5
2-(1-32)-6
2-(l-32)-7
,” 2-( l-32)-8
1 ‘4’2-( l-32)-9
/y
t-(1-32)-1 0
i,/
2-(1-32)-l
1
\
2+32)-12
2-(l-32)-13
t-(1-32)-14
t-(1-32)-15
2-(1-32)-l 6
2-(l-32)-17
2-(l-32)-18
t-(1-32)-19
2-(l-32)-20
..........
..........
.........
;
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
.........
.........
. _. _. . _. .
.........
.........
. . _ . . _. _ _
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
3.0)
1990
Function
Initial
PAGE GROUP (#O) .............
PAGE GROUP (#l)
.............
PAGE GROUP (#2) .............
PAGE GROUP (83) .............
PAGE GROUP (#4) .............
PAGE GROUP (#5) .............
PAGE GROUP (#6) .............
PAGE GROUP (f7)
.............
...........
NIGHT START TIME
REfALLTlME
-Al-T
............
RECALLTIMEEXT ............
..............
TRF- RECALLATT
TRF-RECALLEXT
..............
HNT- RECALLATT
.............
HNT- RECALLEXT
.............
PARK . RECALLATT
............
PARK-RECALLEXT
............
REVERSION TIMER .............
............
CO-COTALKTIME
.................
PAUSE TIMER
CO FLASH TIMER
..............
SLT ON-HOOWFLASH
..........
RINGING nMER
...............
RiNG DELAY TIMER ............
DIALSEND TIMER
.............
.............
PBX FLASH TIMER
CFVVD NO-ANSTIN
...........
REMOTE MAINTE. ID ...........
DISA INCOME ID ...............
........
DISA OUT- GOING lD#l
DISA OUT- GOING lD#2 ........
PROGRAMMING
ID ............
No EPI relay operation
..................
No EPI relay operation
..................
No EPI relay operation
..................
No EPI relay operation
..................
No EPI relay operation
..................
No E?l relay operation
..................
No EPI relay operation
..................
No EPI relay operation
..................
No auto switching
.....................
After20sec
...........................
After14Osec
..........................
After20sec
...........................
After 140 set ..........................
After 20 sec. ...........................
After 14Osec
..........................
After 20 sec. ...........................
After 140 sec. ..........................
After180sec.
..........................
While 10 min. ..........................
3.5sec
................................
1.2se c. ................................
No func. 5 200ms:flash:
1500ms I Disc,
Lessthan6sec
.........................
350ms
................................
l.Osec. ................................
0.8 sec. ................................
12sec .................................
9999 ..................................
No ID is required
.......................
9999 ..................................
9999 ..................................
9999 ..................................
DENY TRUNK USE .............
DIAL SEND TYPE ...............
............
TRUNK GROUP -9”
TRUNK GROUP ‘81.
...........
TRUNK GROUP ‘82’
...........
...........
TRUNK GROUP ‘83’
TRUNK GROUP “84’
...........
TRUNK GROUP “85’
...........
TRUNK GROUP ‘86’
...........
TRUNK TYPE ..................
ENABLE DISA
.................
PRIVATE PORT ................
AUTO PAUSE ..................
...............
On DETECTION
TONE SEND TIME ..............
..............
CALL DIVERSION
INCOME TONE PTN ............
DISCONNECTTIME
_. . _. . _ . . _. .
DJSA STARTTIME
..............
DISA END TIME ................
All functions ope. ......................
DTMF signal
...........................
Accessible
.............................
Noaccess ..............................
Noaccess ..............................
29
29
29
29
29
Noaccess ..............................
29
-8-
Pase
.._
19
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
24
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
28
28
No access ..............................
29
Noaccess ..............................
29
Noaccess ..............................
COline
................................
Disable
...............................
No private line ..........................
Yes ...................................
..........................
DTdetection
7Sms on/SOms off ......................
Not possible
...........................
Income ring synchronized
...............
...........................
After 350ms
.........................
0O:OO to 24:00
0O:OO to 24:00
.........................
29
30
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
32
32
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January
1990
Address
/
./
Ik
\i
/
:‘;,, <
p
I
‘/ i&T
i.,,
((, \
, /-‘;
.J \
.....
:
;
Initial
Number
3-(1-72)-l
3-( l-72)-2
3-( l-72)-3
3-(1-72)4
3-(1-72)-S
3-( l-72)-6
3-(l-72)-7
3-(l-72)-8
34 l-72)-9
3-(1-72)-10
3-(1-72)-l
3-(l-72)-12
3-(l-72)-13
3-(l-72)-14
3-( l-72)-1
3-il-72)-16
3-(1-72)-17
3-(l-72)-18
3-(l-72)-19
3-( l-72)-20
3-( l-72)-2
3-( l-72)-22
3-( l-72)-23
3-( l-72)-24
3-( l-721-25
3-( l-72)-26
3-( l-72)-27
3-( l-72)-28
3-( l-72)-29
3-( l-72)-30
3-( l-72)-3
3-(l-72)-31
3-( l-72)-30
\
3.0)
1
5
1
1
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..... i.. ...
..........
..........
.........
l .........
.........
.........
.........
. ..-. . . . .
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
.........
DBS
data set table
Function
Initial
EXT LOGICAL NO. .............
TEL SETTYPE ..................
USED 8LF PORT#
..............
FORCED LCR MODE
............
FORCED ACCT. CODE
..........
LOCK OUT CODE ...............
CO OFF-HOOK SIGNAL ..........
CALL WAlnNG
................
BUSY OVERRIDE ...............
BUSY OVERRIDDEN
............
PRIME UNE ...................
RING LINE PREF ................
MAKE CO CONF. ..............
SMDR PRINT Y/N ..............
ALERTTONE
VOL ..............
OFF-HOOK SIG PTN ............
PSD DISP. MODE
..............
PAGE GROUP #00
.............
PAGE GROUP #Ol
.............
PAGE GROUP #02 .............
PAGE GROUP #03 .............
PAGE GROUP #04 .............
PAGE GROUP #OS .............
PAGE GROUP #06 .............
PAGE GROUP #07 .............
DISPLAY ON IDLE ..............
DISPLAY ON IDT ...............
DISPLAY ON INT ...............
DISPLAYONCO-1
............
DISPLAY ONCO-2
............
DISPLAY ON PAGE .............
DISPLAY ON WAIT .............
DISPLAY ON BUSY .............
lOOto699(lOto69)
. .............
......
Autoset
..............................
Not connected
.........................
Not connected
.........................
LCR call only ...........................
No function
...........................
Sound
................................
Accept
.............................
Not possible
...........................
Not accept
............................
No function
...........................
Enable
................................
Not possible
...........................
Print ..................................
LowerMedium
........................
Continuous
............................
1 PSD name on 1 large display line ........
No ....................................
No ....................................
No ....................................
No ....................................
No ....................................
No ....................................
No ....................................
No ....................................
No change
............................
No change
............................
............................
No change
............................
No change
No change
............................
No change
............................
............................
No change
No change
............................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . &gB
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
35
3s
3s
3s
35
3s
36
36
36
.;6
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
4-l-(1-73)-(1-32)
....
4-2-(l-73)-(1-32)
....
4-3-(1-8)-l
..........
4-3-( l-8)-2
..........
4-3-l-(3-10)
.........
4-3-&(3-l
0) .........
-(l-16)-(1-8)
......
DAY RING PROG. ..............
NIGHT RING PROG. ............
HUNTING GROUP ..............
NEXT HUNT GROUP ............
HUNT-G.01 PROGRAM
.........
HUNT- G-08 PROGRAM
........
CALL COVERAGE GROUP .......
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
46
47
48
49
so
so
51
5-( l-72)-(1-24)
5-(73-76)-(1-24)
FUNCTION ASSIGN .............
DSS FUNCTION ASSIGN .........
......................................
......................................
52
53
EXT. NAMEMODE
.............
SYS.SPD NAME MODE
.........
PERSONAL SPD NAME MODE
...
ABSENCE MESSAGE.
...........
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
55
55
55
55
6-l
62
6-3
6-4
7-l-l
7-l-2
7-l-3
7-l-4
7-1-s
7-r-6
................
................
................
................
...............
...............
...............
...............
...............
...............
-:::::
INTCALLTRS
..................
DIALING AT INCOMING
........
DIGIT5 TRS DATA ..............
211 TRSYIN ...................
31lTRSYIN
...................
411 TRSYIN ...................
-9-
Restricted
.............................
Dial possible
...........................
No restriction
..........................
impossible
............................
Impossible
............................
Impossible
............................
56
56
57
57
57
57
DBS
Initial
SECTION 400 (Version
data set table
Issue 1 January
Function
Address
?
/‘(
t
i 4’
cf
\
:;,\
.<b
, ‘a \
7-l-7 ...............
7-l-8 ...............
7-l-9 ...............
7-l-10 ..............
7-l-l 1 ..............
7-l-12
..............
7-l-13
..............
7-l-14
..............
7-l-15
..............
7-l-16 ..............
7-2-(3-6)
............
7-3-(3-6)
............
74(1-p)
............
7-S-( l-4) ............
7-6-(l-SO)
..........
....
7-7-(l-72)-(1-32)
7-7-(l-72)-33
.......
7-8-(l-72)-(1-32)
....
7-8-( l-72)-33
.......
7-9-(W)
............
7-9-(s-8)
............
7-9-19-l 2) . _ . . _ _ . . _ _
7-9-(13-16)
.........
Initial
511 TRSY/N ...................
611 TRS Y/N ...................
711 TRS Y/N ...................
811 TRSY/N
...................
911 TRSYIN ...................
7 DIGiTTRSY/N
...............
7 DlGlTTRS Y/N
...............
7 DIGITTRS Y/N ...............
7DlGiTTRSYIN
...............
7 DIGITTRSYIN
...............
SET AREA CODE ...............
SET OFFICE CODE ..............
SPEUAL AREA CODE ...........
SPECIAL OFFICE CODE ..........
SET7DlGlTSTRSNUMBER
......
DAY TRSMPE
..............
DAYTRSTYPE
................
NIGHTTRS TYPE
..............
NIGHTTRS TYPE
..............
AREA CODE lYPE (3-6) .........
OFFICE CODE TYPE (3-6) ........
AREA & OFFICE MPE (3-6) ......
OFFICECODESP-AR(1-4)
......
...............................
Impossible
impossible
impossible
Impossible
impossible
Restriction
Restriction
Restriction
............................
............................
............................
............................
............................
............................
............................
............................
Restriction ............................
Restriction
............................
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
Type 7(No restriction)
..................
......................................
Type 7(No restriction)
..................
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
......................................
B-l-(l-15)-(000-999)-(0
or 1) SETAREA CODE . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-(l-15)-(000-999)-(0
or 1) SET OFFICE CODE
........
8-3-(14)
-.. --.- *. -. . SPECIAL AREA CODE . . ..-...-..
84-(14)
. . . . - -. -. -. . SPECIAL OFFICE CODE . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-(1-15)-(1-S) . . . . . . TIME PRIORIM TABLE . . . . _ . . . . .
M-(1-8)-( l-8) . . . . . . . TRUNK GROUP TABLE . . . . . . . . _ _
8-7-l .-.............
TRUNK GROUP 81 (DIAL DEL)
..
8-7-2 _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRUNK GROUP #2 (DIAL DEL)
__
8-7-3 . - -. . . - . . - . . - . . TRUNK GROUP #3 (DIAL DEL)
..
8-74 . . . . . . . . ..f....
TRUNK GROUP #4 (DIAL DEL)
..
8-7-5 . - * _. -. . . . . . . . . TRUNK GROUP #5 (DIAL DEL)
..
8-7-6 . _ . . . . . . _ . . . . . . TRUNK GROUP #6 (DIAL DEL)
..
8-7-7 . . . . . * . . . . . . . . . TRUNK GROUP #7 (DIAL DEL)
..
8-7-8 - . -. . . . . . . . . * -. TRUNK GROUP #8 (DIAL DEL)
_.
8-8-l - I.. . . . . . . . f . -. TRUNK GROUP #1 (DIAL ADD.)
.
8-8-2 . . *. . . . . . - * -. . . TRUNK GROUP #2(DIALADD.)
..
8-8-3 . . . . . . . ..-...._
TRUNK GROUP #3(DIALADD.)
..
a84
* . . . . . -. . * - -. . . TRUNK GROUP #4(DIALADD.)
._
8-8-s ..-.-.* -...-..
TRUNK GROUP #S(DlALADD.)
..
8-8-6 .--*-.*......-.
TRUNK GROUP #6(DlALADD.)
..
8-8-7 . .._........._.
TRUNK GROUP #7(DlALADD.)
..
8-8-S . .._..e_.......
TRUNK GROUP #S(DIALADD.)
_.
9-l-(1-32)-(1-32)
9-2-(l-32)-(1-32)
9-3-(l-32)-(1-32)
_. . .
___ .
. _. .
3.0)
1990
Pase’
57
57
57
57
57
58
58
58
58
58
59
59
60
61
62.
63
63
64
64
6.5
65
65
65
67
67
68
69
70
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
71
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
COPY TRK MODE
. . . . . _. . . . . . . .
COPY TEL MODE
. . . . _ _ _. . . -. . .
COPY FF MODE . . . . _. . . . . . . . . . _
r) 10-l-(00-89)
_ . . . _. . _ SYSTEM SPD MODE
. . . . _ . . . . . _.
;- \ ’
lo-2-(Ol-72)-(90-99)
.
PERSONAL
SPD
MODE
. . . _ . _ _. .
,’ \
-lO-
......................................
......................................
7s
75
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
Chapter 3
3
DBS
mode
3.0)
FF-1 System
Programming
3 - I- 2 System Program Setting mode
Explanation
- 1 System (System kvotal prowam)
mode
FFl-2#-I#-I#-(0
or l)#
Call duration
c---““““---“-“-“-“-““--““““------”~
: Construction
of explanation
is as follows.
I
: Title _.._
Introduce
the title of each function.
1 Address
.
:
number
Describe the order of key press.
I
I
:
Contents
Explanation
setting data and
I.I
specification.
:
I
Initial set
indicatethe
initial setting data with
:
I
underline.
: ,--““,,,,““““,,,-“,,,,,,,-----,----””~~”””””-~
i
8
!
I
I
i
I
I
I
:
I
:
t
I
I
I
display
The time a telephone
conversation
with an outside
line is taking can be displayed
on a telephone
with an LCD. Whether
or not this display is
required is specified.
If it is set 50 that it is not
displayed,
calls from
*
the conversation
time for incoming
when they are answered
is not displayed
either.
0#: Telephone
l#z Telephone
conversation
conversation
time not displayed
time disolaved
3 - I- 1 Calendar and Time Setting mode
FFl-2#-1#-2#-(0FFl-1 g-1 #( Month
-Day-
Year(Low
2 digits))
l)#
Date Setting
SMDR Timer/
outside call
With this setting the date is stored in the clock
within the system.
The current day and date are displayed
on
In cases wherethe
time taken for a outside call is
to be displayed,
it is specified whether
it will start
16 seconds or 30 seconds after the dialing signal
telephones
equipped
with LCD& while the date
and day are also recorded during SMDR printing,
has been sent out.
This setting only functions
if the outside call
duration
display in l-2-1 has been specified.
etc. The day is automatically
displayed on the system.
MM
DD
YY
(01-12)
(01-31)
(89-99)
For aligning
as follows
calculated
and
Starting
This setting notwithstanding,
will start immediately,
and
after they
time display
for
for incoming
calls
display 16 seconds
are answered.
(00-20)
the time to February
251995,
input
O#: Startina
from
16 sec.
1#: Starting
from
30 sec.
0225958
FFl-2#-I#-3#-(0
or I)#
LCR (Least Cost Routing)
FF 1-l #-2f(Hour(24l+format)
- Minute
This is set for using the LCR call function.
in the clock
specified
whether
making an outside
Time Setting
With this setting the time
within the system.
The current
equipped
recorded
HH
time
is displayed
is stored
In either
on telephones
with LCDs, while the time is also
during SMDR printing,
etc.
(00-23)
MM
(00-59)
For aligning the time to 3:28pm,
1 SZB#
fC0~Fl-#:01
call
)#
input
as follows.
It is
or not LCR is to be used when
call by dial key 9.
case it is necessary
to cut the jumper
on the CPU card in the main cabinet.
300 the “Installation
Manual”
about
See Section
this.
it is also necessary to set “FFZ-N+3#”
Trunk Access Group 9” of “2. Trunk
and “Pooled
Mode”.
OR: Pooled Trunk Access call when 9 keved in
l#: Least Cost Routing call when 9 keyed in
:oi
-1 l-
wire
400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January
1990
DBS
FF-1 System mode
FFI-2C1#-4#(89
SECTION
FFl-2#-l#-6#-(0
- OO)#
SSD (System Speed Dial) toil restriction
canceling
(Override
TRS)
It can be set so that calls from specified
Auto -flash
This setting
outside line
more digits
dialing the
SSD
numbers are not restricted
even on telephones
set fortoll
restriction
types from 2 to 6.
at distant branches, fire station, etc
a 2 digit Auto-(00
- 89) number is stored
the SSD code, when a
number stored are not
For example, when 80
made with the 10 SSD
for
Atthis
call is made, from 89 to the
restricted.
is specified, calls can be
codes comprising
Auto-(80 -
89) despite
restrictions.
(00 - 89)#:
Calls can be made by SSD code 00 - 89
despite restrictions
jCONFJ-R:
Toll restriction
twes
durinaSSD
calls
redial
is for automatically
cutting of an
by pressing the redial key after one or
have been dialed and automatically
same number again.
In the case of the system is connected
to the PBX,
sometimesthe
PBX becomes on - hold status by
the operation
of ‘Automatically
cutting of an
outside line’ using Redial key.
For example,
it is set so that calls can be made
from telephones
subjectto
restrictions
such as
those
When
- 1)#
time,
Please set for “NO Auto
Flash’
0#: No auto flash
l#: Auto flaih
Note I:
FFI- 2#- l#-S#-(O
When setting this function, check that it
is aligned with the setting for the
outside line ffash time as they are
related.
Note 2: There is no flash if the dial is not input
2 - 6 also aoolied
or l)#
Diai display restriction
speed dial call
during
system
lt is specified whether
the telephone
number
be indicated
on the LCD during dialing when
making a call by SSD (80 - 89).
is to
-
If set not to display, rediaiing
after an SSD call and
diaiing with an LCR call are also not displayed.
However, the names stored for SSD are displayed
or l)#
FFl-2#-1#-8#-(0
at such times.
On-hook
O#: Dialino
18: Dialing
Note:
A outside
disolaved durina Autd80
- 89) call
not displayed during Auto-(80
- 89) call
transfer
call can be transferred
to another
extension
simply by pressing that extension’s
number and placing the handset on hook.
The party to which the call is being transferred
Auto (00 - 79) are displayed all the time.
can talk with
by lifting
the party on the outside
his/her
handset
when
tone sounds.
If this is not set, see operating
to transfer.
0#: On-hook
I#: On-hook
-12-
transfer
transfer
disable
enable
line simply
the incoming
instructions
call
to how
.
SECTION 400 (Version
issue 1 January 1990
FFl-2#-l#-9#-(0
3.0)
FF-1 System
or l)#
Outside
FFI-2#-I#-1
line automatic
hold
(Key Bank Hold)
It is possible to set an extension
outside call on hold temporarily
call on another
outside line.
O#: No automatic
1#: Automatic
FFl-2#-1#-
During
be put
button
line or
for putting an
while making a
intend to use for the other call without
for pressing the HOLD key.
call put on hold
by this
put on
line you
the need
method
resume
is on
Note:
or I)#
outside
line hold
extension
is to be put on system hold or exclusive
hold.
This setting
notwithstanding,
it is not possible to
another
appearance
outside
outside
line during
outside
call.
TRF
Setting 0% here is related to setting the
SLT hooking flash timer.
FFI-2#-1#-12#-(0
or l)#
Extension
number
digit
setting
This is for specifying
whether
the extension
number is to comprise 2 digits (Ext 10 - 69) or 3
digits (Ext 100 - 699). When over 60 extensions
are installed, the setting for 3 digits should be
done, before carrying out other settings.
By effecting
this setting, the settings related to
extension
groups and settings involving
other
extension
numbers all become invalid.
In addition,
all the extension
numbers and
functions
assigned to the FF keys of each extension
are reset to their initial status.
At this time it is necessary to cut off the power for
the main cabinet once.
Warn enough when this setting will be done.
This setting is for specifying
whether
a call on an
outside line not assigned to an FF key on your
obtain
the initial
0#: Get new IDT to another
1%: Retrieve held CO line
hold
Non - appearance
a telephone
call by SLTthe outside line can
on hold by lightly tapping the hook
(hooking
operation),
and another outside
extension
can then be telephoned.
This setting is for specifying
whether
to wait for
the intercom
dial tone again orto release hold and
hold
10#-(0
- 1)#
SLT Flash control
In this case the initiaicail
is automatically
hold by pressing the FF key for the outside
A telephone
sy$tem hold.
l#-(0
DBS
mode
non -
line hold.
0#: Exclusive hold
1 R: Svstem hold
Note 1: During non - appearance outside line put
on hold, the other outside line cannot to
. be held.
Note 2: This function apples to Single Line
Telephone.
O##:
1#e
-13-
2 digits
3 diuits
(Extension
(Extension
numbers 10 - 69)
num hers 100 - 699)
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January
DBS
FF-1 System mode
FFl-2#-l#-
FFl-2#-1#-17#-(0
13#-(0 of I)#
Alternate
attendants
mode
setting
When
or I)#
Attendant
calling
mode
Extension
Information
mode
OS:
No Information
in busv override
1#:
Information
18#-(0
restricted
tone
with
busy
sent out for busy override
or l)#
area setting
on
an
O#:
I#:
are regarded
by office
as local calls and so
codes, etc.
No + 1 Area code location
Necessarv the 1 + Area code location
SSD name
l)#
display
mode
This specifiesthe
quantity
of names displayed
on
the large display. The option is for 5 names or 10
names. When displaying
10 names the maximum
length shown will be 7 characters.
or l)#
setting
tone
installation
is not necessary
for voice calling
When extension calling by voice, the information
tone (Splash tone “Pu..!‘)
can first be sounded for
0.5 seconds from the extension
of the party being
called.
This is specified when the extension
calling mode
is set to voice call.
08:
l#:
regarding
FFl-2k1#-19#-(0or
tone
has been
outside the area where the system is installed.
If 1
is necessary when making calls to just some of the
areas, set 1 + Area. Calls o other areas for which 1
Tone call
Voice call
FFl-2#-1#-16+(0
on an extension
This specifies if necessary or not to the dial 1
before the area code when making calls to places
This specifies if the extension’s
(except
attendant’s)
intercom call is voice or tone. In
addition,
the attendant
can switch this setting
individual
calls by dialing 11) after establishing
intercom
call
0%:
.l#:
for busy
It is necessary to have a setting
override for each extension.
System
or l)#
calling
the conversation
FFl-2#-1#-
Tone call from attnndant
Voice call from attendant
FFl-2#-l#-15#-(0
setting
This setting notwithstanding,
busy override
cannot be implemented
for an extension
involved
in a conference
call.
This specifies if the attendant’s
intercom
call is
voice or tone. In addition,
the attendant
can
switch this setting on individual
calls by dialing [ 1I
after establishing
an intercom
call
O#:
1%:
tone
interrupted,
the information
one is sent out to
the extension of the party being overridden
to
indicate the fact
OB: No alternate
mode
1 R: Alternate
mode
FFI-t#-I#-14#-(0
or l)#
Information
override
This setting is for when 2 attendants
phones have
been installed in the system.
When setting in the alternate
mode, first call the
attendant’s
phone connected
to extension
port
No. 1.
.
If this is busy, call the attendant’s
connected
to
extension pon No. 2.
3.0)
1990
0#:
Display
%#?-Displav
No Information
tone with in voice call
Information
tone sounds for voice call
-14-
5 names in large display
10 names in lame disolay
y
”
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
FFl-2#-1P20#-(0
FF-1 System
FFl-2#-2#-2#-(0
or l-9)#
or l)#
Application interface card assignment
Even/odd number parity
This specifies the extension
card slot number for
the API card to be used.
Assign this only when using the optional
software.
The mode of the parity check for the
communication
data is set
O#:No API card assianed
1B:Extension
card slot 1 is API
2P: Extension card slot 2 is API
3#: Extension card slot 3 is API
48: Extension card slot 4 is API
f#:Extension
card slot 5 is API
6B:Extension
card slot 6 isAPI
ir#:Extension
card slot 7 is API
8#:Extension
card slot 8 isAPI
9#: Extension card slot 9 is API
FFl-2#-l#-21#-(0
DBS
mode
3.0)
09: Odd number
1 R: Even number
card
card
card
FFl-2#-
2#-38-(1-
parity
oarity
4)i
Data transmission
card
speed (baud rate)
The baud rate for data transmission
is set between
300 bps and 9600 bps, However, whatever
the
setting may be usually, it is 300 bps when carrying
out remote maintenance
through
the telephone
card
card
card
card
card
or l-9)#
Voice mail busy tone mode
This specifies if the DBS will send busy tone or
silence to the voice mail ports after an internal
conversation
has ended.
FFl-2#-2#-4#-(l-3)#
##:Silence
to voice mail- -*i Wr
a#:085
internal
busv tone to voice mail
FFl-2#-2#-lk(0
Stop bit length
The length
28: 1.5 bits
3%: 2 bits
This is for aligning
the data protocol specifications
between
the machines when connecting
anSlvlDR
printer to the system or carrying out remote
maintenance
through
the telephone
circuit,
example. Here it is specified whether
the occurrence
of errors during the
communication
of data. The method
whetherthis
is referred
adding
OR: No oaritv
FFl-2+2#-5#-(1-
for
(Less than
90 port system only)
4)#
Data length
to check for
The length of the transmitted
data is set between
5 and 8 bi%.
18: 5 bits
(Less than 90 port system only)
of checking
up the data sent and determining
constitutes
to as a parity
data is
set
l#: 1 bit
or 1)s
Parity check
involves
of the stop bit for transmitted
2%: 6 bits
3#: 7 bits
an odd or even value. This
check
4#: 8 bits
check
1 #: Parity check
-15
(Lessthan
90 port system only)
CBS
FF-1 System
FEI-2#-2#-6#-(0
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January
1990
mode
or l)#
SMDR printing
FFl-2#-2#-8#-(0
mode
the outgoing
calls only
incomina
and outaoina
k C,
.$j
? .Ci’
,. -+
iOn/O~-~#l-[9~-[2~-[Onf
[OnlOfn-~#~-i9~-~~-~On/O~
O#:
l#:
calls
SMDR orintina
SMDR printing
of communication
data only
of data titles in addition
to
communication
FFl-2#-2#-9#-(0
or l)#
Program
data
data dump
mode
(X on/X off)
This is to specify whether
or not to control the X
on/X off code should the data buffer overflow
when connecting
the data terminal
for carrying
Bus data print mode
Bus data resist mode
OW Bus data accumuia
SMDR printout
3 (Title)
making the data easy to read off, or to have the
data only when using the SMDR printer.
If there are titles, they are printed every 60 lines.
NoterFor the SMDR printer to operate, as we// as
specifying printing
in the system program
it is
necessary to set the following
from the
attendant’s
phone.
iO~O~-~#~-~9l-~Ol-~On/O~
lOn/Off7-l#~-[9~-[l~-[OnfO~
mode
It is specified whether
to include titles such as
“TIME’,
‘DURAT’
and ‘CO#on the top line for
the former.
OC: SMDR printing
1 f: SMDR orintina
or 1)#
SMDR printing
1 (Outgoing/
Incoming)
This is for specifying whether
to have the contents
recorded
with the SMDR printer when making
outside calls only, or to have the contents when
answering
incoming calls printed in addition
to
out maintenance
to the RS-232C interface
connecting
the SMDR
te
for
0#: X on/X off no control
FFl-2#-2#-7#-(0
or l)#
SMDR printing
This is for specifying
lt:
mode
2 (Long /Local)
whetherto
have the contents
FFl-2#-3#-1#-(0
in addition
The access numbers are set for when using the PBX
circuit on the premises for as the systems outside
lines, or for connecting
from a WAIT line, etc. to a
line of a telephone
central office.
to the former.
O#:
SMDR priming
the long distance
l#:
SMDR orintina
all outaoina
Note
7: me long distance
(N =2-s,
P = 0.l.X
- 999 or O* - 99*)#
PBX Dial 1
recorded
with the SMDR printer when making toll
calls only, or to have the contents when making
local calls printed
X on/x off controlled
calls only
calls
This setting is used for determining
the dialing
when there are call restrictions
for TRS, etc. In
addition,
“*- can be stored as the wild card setting
here.
calls is as follows.
= O-9)
Non + I Area
NPX-NNX-XxXx
+ 1 Area I-NPX-NNX-XxXx
When 7 * is set, for example, 70 to 79 are taken
PBX dialing. To clear the stored data, press
NPX is the area number, NNX the o ffke
number. and XXXX the phone number.
[CONF] key.
If the dialing starts with I or 0, it is deemed
be a long distance calls.
(0 - 9.00 - 99,000Access numbers
to
999 or 0’ - 9*, OO* - gg*)#:
Note : To store wild
* key.
-16
as
card(*),
use FF7 1 instead
of
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
FFl-2#-3#-2#-(0
DBS
mode
3.0)
FF-1 System
- 999,0r
0’ - 99’)#
FF?-2#-3#-a#-(0
PBX Dial 2
- 999,0r
0’ - 99*)#
PBX Dial 8
Same as PBX Dial 1.
Same as PBX Dial 1.
(0 - 9,00 - 99,000 - 999 or 0’ - 9*, OO* - 99*)#:
Co access numbers
(0 - 9,00 - 99,000 - 999 or o* - 9’, 00’ - 99’)#:
CO access numbers
FFl-2#-3#-3#-(0
- 999,0r
0’ - 99*)#
FFl-2#-3#-9#-(1-
PBX Dial 3
Automatic pause position for each dial Dial 1
Same as PBX Dial 1.
(0 - 9,QO - 99,000 - 999 or 0’ - 9’,00’
Co access numbers
FFl-2#-3#-4#-(0
- 999,0r
This is the setting for automatically
inserting
a
pause during the dialing. When the PBX,
etc.
is
_
accessed for making
a call, several seconds are
required from when the PBX receives the access
- 99’)#:
0’ - 99*)#
numberto
when the connection
is made with a
telephone
central office line.
Dialing sent out before this connection
is made
PBX Dial 4
Same as PBX Dial l_
will be invalid
connection.
(0 - 9,00 - 99,000 - 999 or 0’ - 9*, 00” - 99’)#:
Co access numbers
FFl-2#-3#-5#-(0
- 999,0r
3)#
and may result
in a wrong
With this setting completely
trouble
free dialing
enabled. Moreover,
this setting is also effective
for dialing from SSD and PSD.
0’ - 99*)#
PBX Dial 5
Same as PBX Dial 1.
The actual pause time is set separately
timer.FFl-3#-7#)
(0 - 9,00 - 99,000 - 999 or O* - 9*, 00’ - 99’)#:
Co access numbers
It is specified after which digit dialed there
be a pause having made a connection
with
outside line of the system and then dialing
FFl-2#-3#-6#-(0
- 999,0r
0’ - 99’)#
(pause
should
an
I.
[CONFl%: No automatic
uause after dialino 1
1C: Automatic
pause on 1st digit after dialing
PBX Dial 6
Same as PBX Dial 1.
(0 - 9,00 - 99,000 - 999 or 0’ - 9’. 00’ - W)#:
Co access numbers
2%:
atfim
Automatic
pause on 2nd digit
after
dialing
3#:
atfim
Automatic
pause on 3rd digit
after
dialing
at first.
FFl-2#-3#-7#-(0
- 999,0r
0’ - 99*)#
PBX Dial 7
Note : Automatic
setting
Same as PBX Dial 1.
13%)
(0 - 9.00 - 99,000
- 999 or Of - 9*, 00’ - 99’)#:
Co access numbers
-17-
is
pause can’t activate
without
pause for each trunk(FR-(l-32)+
1
1
l
DBS
FF-1 System
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January
mode
FFl-2#-3#-lO#-(1
- 3)#
Automatic
pause
FFl-t#-3#-13#-(1
position
for each dial -
3.0)
1990
- 3)#
Automatic
pause
position
for each dial -
Dial 2
Dial 5
Same as (FFl-2#-3#-(13)#).
lt is specified after
which digit dialed there should be a pause having
Same as (FFl-2#-3#-(l3)#).
It is specified after
which digit dialed there should be a pause having
made a connection
with an outside line of the
system and then dialing 5.
made a connection
with an outside
system and then dialing 2.
line of the
ICONFl#:
No automatic
pause after dialina 2
l#: Automatic
pause at 1st digit after dialing 2
jCONFl#:
No automatic
cause after dialina 5
l#: Automatic pause at 1st digit after dialing 5
2#: Automatic pause at 2nd digit after dialing 2
2#: Automatic
3#: Automatic
3#: Automatic
FFl-2#-3#-l l#-(
pause at 3rd digit
after
dialing
2
1 - 3)#
Automatic
pause
position
pause at 2nd digit after dialing
pause at 3rd
- digit after dialing
5
5
FFl-2#-3#-14#-(l-
3)#
for each dial -
Automatic
pause
It is specified
Same as (FFl-2#-3#-(1
- 3)#).
It is specified after
which digit dialed there should be a pause having
Dial 3
position
for each dial -
Dial 6
Same as (FFl-2#-3#-(1
- 3)#).
after
which digit dialed there should be a pause having
made a connection
with an outside line of the
system and then dialing 3.
made a connection
with an outside
system and then dialing 6.
line of the
ICONFlR: No automatic
cause after dialina 3
18: Automatic
pause on 1st digit after dialing 3
ICONFl#:
No automatic
Pause after dialinq 6
l#: Automatic
pause at 1st digit after dialing 6
2#: Automatic
3#: Automatic
2#: Automatic
3#: Automatic
pause on 2nd digit after dialing
pause on 3rd digit after dialing
FFl-2#-3#-12#-(1
- 3)#
Automatic
pause
3
3
FFl-2#-3#-l5#-(l-
position
for each dial -
pause
position
for each dial -
Dial 7
Same as (FFl-2#-3#-(13)#).
which digit dialed there should
It is specified after
be a pause having
made a connection
with an outside
system and then dialing 4.
jCONFl#:
6
6
3)#
Automatic
Dial 4
pause at 2nd digit after dialing
pause at 3rd digit after dialing
No automatic
Same as (FFl-2#-3#-(l3)#).
It is specified after
which digit dialed there should be a pause having
made a connection
with an outside line of the
line of the
oause after
after
system and then dialing
dialino
1~8: Automatic
pause at 1st digit
dialing
2#: Automatic
3#: Automatic
pause at 2nd digit after dialing
pause at 3rd digit after dialing
4
[CONFI#:
No automatic
7.
Dause after dialina
4
1#: Automatic
pause at 1st digit
4
4
2#: Automatic
3#: Automatic
pause at 2nd digit after dialing
pause at 3rd digit after dialing
-18-
after dialing
7
7
7
7
SECTION 400 (Version3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
FFl-2#-3#-16#-(1
- 3)#
Automatic
pause
FFl-2#-4#-1
position
Same as (FFl-2#-3#-(1
- 3)#).
which digit dialed there should
Control ring patterns for UNA control
terminals (M, c B)
It is specified after
be a pause having
When using UNA (Universal
Night Answer), the
operating
specifications
for each of the relay
made a connection
with an outside
system and then dialing 8.
controlled
terminals
are determined.
When
utilizing
a sound source for the buzzer, etc., ” 1 set
on/3 set off’ is selected.
line of the
[CONFI#:
No automatic
cause after dialina 8
_ l#: Automatic
pause at 1st digit after dialing 8
pause at 2nd digit afkerdialing
pause at 3rd digit after dialing
Automatic
Automatic
FFl-2#-3#-17#-(l-
3)#
Automatic
pause
position
When operating
with the pattern set, it is
connected
from terminal
C to terminal
M or
released from terminal
C to terminal
8. This
setting is only effective when UNA is operating
incoming
calls on outside lines.
8
8
for each dial -
Note : Ext pan 73 is ringing assignment
terminal
(FF4-l#,
FF4-2#)
Dial 9
Same as (FFI-t#-3#-(l3)#).
It is specified after
which digit dialed there should be a pause having
made a connection
with an o&de
line of the
system and then
dialing
B-(0 or l)#
for each dial -
Dial 8
t#:
3#:
OR:
3 secl 1 set interval
l#:
Continuously
No automatic
oause after
diaiino
pause at 1st digit after dialing 9
pause at 2nd digit after dialing 9
3%: Automatic
pause at 3rd digit
FFl-2#-3#-18#-(1
Automatic
Dial 0
after
dialing
It is set whether
position
Same as (FFl-2#-3#-(1which digit dialed there
3)#).
should
is to be used when
for each dial It is specified after
be a pause having
made a connection
with an outside
system and then dialing 0.
the EPI (External
calling
paging
0%:
No EPI relay ooeration
grouD 00
l#:
EPI relay operation
group 00
tnterface)
group
#OO.
when
when
callina
calling
oaainq
paging
or 1)#
FFl-2#-4#-3#-(0
EP1control when paging - #Ol
line of the
It is set whether
the EPI (External
is to be used when calling paging
ICONFl#:
No automatic
pause afterdialino
0
1 #: Automatic
pause a! 1 St digit after dialing 0
O#:
2#: Automatic
3#: Automatic
No EPI relay operation
arouo 01
I#:
EPI relay operation
pause at 2nd digit after dialing
pause at 3rd digit after dialing
Page
9
-3)#
pause
9r l)#
EPI control when paging - #OO
9
1 B: Automatic
2#: Automatic
0
0
group
-19-
01
Page Interface)
group #Ol.
when
when
callina
calling
for
for IJ NA
9.
FFl-2#-4#-2#-(0
ICONFI#:
DBS
mode
FF-1 System
oaoinq
paging
DBS
FF-1 System
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January
1990
mode
FFl-2#-4#-4#-(0
or l)#
FFl-2#-4#-B#-(0
when paging
EP! control
- #02
It is set whether the EPI (External Page Interface)
to be used when calling paging group %02.
O#:
l#:
when
No EPI relav ooeration
arouo 03
EPI relay operation
group
- #03
EPI control
when
when
callina
calling
l#:
O#:
paging
l#:
is
EPI relay operation
specifications
or ?)#
EPIcontrol when paging - #05
It is set whether the EPI (External Page Interface)
to be used when calling paging group #OS.
No EPI retav ooeration
l#:
- #07
when
when
callinq
calling
is
oaoinq
paging
07
when
when
callinq
calling
for
operating
the system.
The appropriate
settings should be specified
according
to the users preferences
and actual
method of use, while also taking into account
04
grow
05
EPI relay operation
paging
I- 3 System 7imerSetting
Mode
Here the settings relating
to time are made
No EPI reiav ooeration
when callino oaoinq
arouo 04
EPI relay operation
when calling paging
O#:
or l)#
when
3-
or l)#
FFl-2#-4#-7#-(0
is
06
No EPI relav ooeration
tarouo 07
group
control when paging - #04
group
- #06
It is set whether the EPI (External Page Interface)
to be used when calling paging group #07.
oaoinq
It is set whetherthe
EPI (External Page Interface)
to be used when calling paging group #04.
O+:
is
03
FFl-2#-4#-6#-(0
EPI
l#:
FFl-2#-4#-9#-(0
paging
paging
No EPI relav operation
when callino oaqinq
arouo 06
EPI relay operation
when calling paging
group
It is set whether the EPI (External Page Interface)
to be used when calling paging group #03.
1#:
O#:
or l)#
EPI control
when
It is set whether the EPI (External Page Interface)
to be used when calling paging group #06.
02
FFl-2#-4#-f#-(O
O#:
is
No EPI relav operation
when callino paqinq
arouo 02
EPI relay operation
when calling paging
group
or l)#
EPI control
is
oaainq
paging
group 05
-2o-
for the outside
lines connected.
the
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
FFl-3#-1
S-(0000
DBS
FF-I System .mode
3.0)
FFl-3#-3#-(1-
- 2359)#
lt)#
Automatic switching time for nighttime
Extensions hold recall timer
call mode
If outside line call is not answered within the
specified time after having been put on hold from
an extension other than the attendant’s
phone,
the recall warning
tone star& to sound to indicate
The time for switching
from daytime call mode to
nighttime
call mode is set so that the system does
it automatically
without
performing
the operation.
the attendant
thatthe
It is specified using the 24 hour system. For
example, when the system is to switch to the
nighttime
(00:OOam
No automatic
(0000 - 2359)#:
Note:
FFl-3#-2#-(
switchina
niahttime
call mode
Automatic
mode
switching
has been exceeded.
O#:No recall
1 #:Recall after
mode at 8:02pm, 2002 is input
- 0000
/
11:59pm - 2359)
JCONFIW:
time
to
to nighttime
The day and nigh TRS modes can be set to
different
types. Confirm the 776 modes.
1 - 12)#
2B:Recall
3#:Recall
4#:Recall
20 seconds
after 40 seconds
after 60 seconds
after 80 seconds
5#:Recail
6#:Recall
78:Recall
after
after
after
100 seconds
120 seconds
140 seconds
8#:Recall
after
9#: Recall after
160 seconds
180 seconds
10#: Recall after
I;#: Recall after
200 seconds
220 seconds
12f:Recall
240 seconds
after
Attendant’s hold recall timer
FFl-3#-4#-(1-
If an outside line call is not answered
within the
specified
time after having been put on hold by
the attendant’s
recall warning
that the time
12)#
Attendant’s transfer recall timer
This specifies if an outside line is transferred
to
another extension
and is left unanswered
for the
phone [by the attendant],
the
tone starts to sound to indicate
length equal to or greater
will recall to the attendant
has been exceeded.
O#:No recall
1 #:Recali after
20 seconds
0%: No recall
2#:Recall
3#:Recall
40 seconds
60 seconds
18: Recall after
_ 2#: Recall after
after
after
.4#:Recall
after
5#: Recall after
80 seconds
1OOseconds
6#: Recall after
120 seconds
7#: Recall after
8#:Recall
afier
140 seconds
160 seconds
3#:Recall
220 seconds
12#: Recall after
240 seconds
20 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
1ZR:Recall after 80 seconds
S#:Recall after 100 seconds
68:Recall
9#: Recall after 180 seconds
1 O#:Recall after 200 seconds
1 1 #: Recall after
after
then
after
120 seconds
7#: Recall after
8kRecall
after
140 seconds
160 seconds
9#:Recall
lO#:Recall
after 180 seconds
after 200 seconds
1 1 #: Recall after 220 seconds
1Z#:Recall
after 240 seconds
-21-
this timer
the call
ms
FF-1 System
Ff-?-3#-5#-
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January
mode
(1 - 12)#
Extension
FFl-3#-7#-
Transfer
in.
recall timer
O#:No recall
1 #:Recall after
after 40 seconds
after 60 seconds
after 80 seconds
after 100 seconds
after 120 seconds
7#:Recall
(l&Recall
after
after
3#:Recall
48:RecaII
58: Recall
6#:Recall
140 seconds
160 seconds
11 #:Recall
12#:Recall
after 220 seconds
after 240 seconds
240 seconds
12)f
Attendant
12)#
Attendant’s hunting red1 timer
extension
attendant
timer.
140 seconds
160 seconds
‘9#:Recall
after 180 seconds
1 O#:Recalf after 200 seconds
FFl-388#-(l -
Calls which
after 60 seconds
after 80 seconds
after 100 seconds
after 120 seconds
-7#: Recall after
8#:Recall
after
9#: Recall after 180 seconds
1 O#:Recall after 200 seconds
11 #:Recall after 220 seconds
after
recall
1 #: Recall after 20 seconds
2%:Recall after 40 seconds
20 seconds
2#:Recall
3B:Recall
4#:Recall
S#:Recall
6#:Recall
FFl-3#-6#-(l -
timer
the transfer.
,O#:No
12#:Recall
(1 - 12)#
Hunting.recaff
If a transferred
incoming
call is not answer by any
hunting
group member within the specified time
after having been put on hold from an extension,
the call rings back to the transferor
extension.
This specifiesif
an outside line is transferred
to
another extension and is left unanswered
for the
length equal to or greater then this timer the call
will recall to the original extension
which
established
3.0)
1990
are transferred
to a hunt
group
park hold recall timer
If an attendant
by any
place a call in any of the 10 system
park orbits, and leaves the call there for longer
than the specified time, the call wiil recall to the
attendant.
within the hunt group will recall to the
aiter the specified time of this recall
O#:No recall
1 #:Recall after 20 seconds
O#:No recall
l#: Recall after 20 seconds
Z#:Recall
after 40 seconds
2C:Recall
3#:Recall
after 40 seconds
after 60 seconds
3#:Recall
O#:Recall
after 60 seconds
atier 80 seconds
48: Recall after 80 seconds
59:Recall
after lOOseconds
5#: Recall after
6#:Recall
after
100 seconds
120 seconds
6#z Recall after
7B:RecalI after
I20 seconds
140 seconds
7iF:Recall
140 seconds
8#:Recall
after
9#: Recall after
160 seconds
180 seconds
after
(I#:Recall
after 160 seconds
9#:Recall
after 180 seconds
lO#:Recallafter200seconds
lO#:Recall
11 #:Recail
after 200 seconds
after 220 seconds
lZ#:Recallafter240seconds
ll#:Recallafter220seconds
12#:Recallafrer240seconds
-22-
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January
DBS
3.0)
FF-1 System
1990
FFl-3#-1
l#- (I-
mode
15)#
Extension park hold recall timer
Unsupervisedconference monitor time
(CO-CO conference monitoring
timer)
If an extension
place a call in their park orbits, and
leaves the call there for longer than the specified
The time for which a call is enabled through
outside line when made from DISA or when
time,
conducted
through
or&de
lines only can be
restricted within the range of 0 to 75 minutes.
If the specified time is exceeded, the outside lines
FFl-3#-9#-
(I-
12)#
the call will recall
to the extension.
O#:No recall
1 #:Recall after
2#:Recall
after
20 seconds
40 seconds
are automatically
3B:Recall
4#:Recall
60 seconds
80 seconds
O#:Disable
l#:UptoSmin.
100 seconds
120 seconds
140 seconds
2R:Un
3#:Up
to 10 min.
to 15 min.
4#:Up
5X:Up
to 20 min.
to 25 min.
after
after
S#:Recall after
68:Recall
after
7#: Recall after
8#: Recall after 160 seconds
9#:RecalI after 180 seconds
1O#:Recall after 200 seconds
11 #:Recall
lZ#:Recall
FFl-3#-lO#-(l -
after
after
an
cut off.
6#:Up to 30 min.
7#:Up to 35 min.
S#:Upto40min.
220 seconds
240 seconds
9#: Up to 45 min.
lO#:Upto
50 min.
ll#:UptoSSmin.
12)#
Call reversion timer for attendant
12#:Up to 60 min.
13#:Up to 65 min.
14#:Upto
70 min.
If an outside line call which has been put on hold
by the attendant’s
phone is not answered
by an
extension
other than the attendant’s
phone
within the specified time, it is transferred to the
1 S#:Up
to 75 min.
attendant’s
phone and the extension’s
recall timer
does not function.This
function
is not possible
when the system is in the night mode.
Note:
It is necessary to set for outside calls made
from DISA and calls through outside lines
only separa teiy.
O#:No Reversion call
1%: Reversion call after 20 seconds
2#:Reversion
3#:Reversion
call after
call after
40 seconds
60 seconds
4#:Reversion
call after
80 seconds
S#:Reversion
6#:Reversion
call after
call after
100 seconds
120 seconds
7f:Reversion
S#:Reversion
call after
call after
140 seconds
160 seconds
9#:Reversion
101:Reversion
11 #:Reversion
12f:Reversion
call after 180 seconds
call after 200 seconds
call after 220 seconds
call after 240 seconds
-23-
DBS
FF-1 System
FFl-3#-12#-(1-
Auto
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January
mode
lS)#
FFl-3#-13#-(0
pause timer
’
Outside
When PBX lines and WATT lines are
accommodated
as outside lines of the system and
connected to the telephone
central
office, it is
- lO)#
line flash
timer
The time for which the outside line is temporarily
released
(flash time) when the [FtASH] key or
[REDIAL] key has been pressed is set The outside
line is released while the [FLASH] key is pressed,
even though this may be longer than the time set
necessary to have a pause in the dialing
until the
dialing signal from the DBS is received and until
the dial tone is sent out from the connected
CO.
for it
line. If this is neglected,
the wrong party may be
contacted or the connection
may not be made.
This pause time can be automatically
set while
when dialing, and it is also possible to store a
O#: No flash
l#: Minimum
2#: Minimum
line flash time of 0.2 seconds
line flash time of 0.3 seconds
pause for stored dialing to SSD, PSD, etc. if
. .
necessary. Generally speaking it is sufficient
to
specify a standby time comprising
one pause. But
if an extremely long pause time is required,
you
38:
4#:
5%:
S#:
line
line
line
line
can accommodate
this by pressing the required
numberwhiie
storing the [REDIALJ key.
7#: Minimum
8#: Minimum
9#: Minimum
O#:No pause time
1#:One pause time of OS seconds
101:
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum
pause time of 1 .O seconds
Note:
This setting
pause time of 1.5 seconds
pause time of 2.0 seconds
pause time of 2.5 seconds
from
SLT.
W:One
7R:One
8#:0ne
pause time of 3.0 seconds
cause time of 3.5 seconds
pause time of 4.0 seconds
pause time of 5.0 seconds
pause time of 5.0 seconds
pause time of 5.0 seconds
Note
1: The position
the hooking
of 5.0 seconds
at which
the pause
is stored
is not effective
detection
operation)
No detect
\
time is
inserted while dialing is specified
according
to the system setting for each
dial number.
Note 2: When [RED/AL]
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
when
operating
timer
It is.specified as to whether
the line flash is to
function
orthe line.is to be disconnected
when
the hook button is pressed lightly (referred
to as
9#:0ne
pause time of 4.5 seconds
lO#:One
pause time of 5.0 seconds
11 #:One pause time of 5.0 seconds
13#:0ne
14#:0ne
lS#:One
of
of
of
of
- 6)+
SLT on-hook
pause time
time
time
time
time
line Rash time of 1.1 seconds
3#:0ne
4#:0ne
5#:0ne
FFl-3#-14#-(0
flash
flash
flash
flash
line flash time of 0.8 seconds
line flash time of 0.9 seconds
line flash time of 1.0 seconds
2#:One
12%:One
3.0)
1990
for 550 and PSD, a
pause for the set time only is inserted
during the dialing. But even when it is not
set, if there are specified dial numbers as in
Note 1, a pause is automatically
inserted.
-24-
0%:
I#:
8:
Less than 200
Lessthan 200
Lessthan
3#:
4#:
Less than 200
Less than 200
5#:
Less than 200
6#:
Less than 200
with
SLT.
tine flash
Disconnect
/
200 - 500 ms
200-750
ms
200-lOOOms
200 - 1200 ms
Over 500 ms
Over 750 mr
OverlOOOms
Over 1200 ms
200 - 1500 ms
Over 1500 ms
Over 200 ms
30 - 140 ms
Over 500 mr
iLJ
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
3.0)
DBS
mode
FF-1 System
FFI-3#-15+(0-3)#
FFl-3#-16#-(0-
15)#
Outside incoming ring signal detection
Incoming ring signal expand timer
timer
to function normally.
The continuous
time forthe
incoming
call signal can be set within the range of
4 - 10 seconds. Even if the telephone
has already
been cut off by the party making it and the
(First ring signal delay timer)
An incoming
ring tone is prepared
for sending out
to extensions
in the system to synchronizing
to the
incoming
call signal from outside lines. If the first
incoming
call signal from the outside line is too
short when the incoming
call tone sent out is set to
incoming
call signal from the telephone
line is
discontinued,
the system still treats it as an
synchronize
with the incoming
for which the call tone sounds
incoming
call during the time set This is because
there are cases when there is a long cycle
depending
on the incoming
call signal and in such
cases the system deems that the incoming
call has
it is always possible to receive a regular incoming
call tone without
it being controlled
by the length
of time forthe incoming
call signal. In this case
ended. So this is to prevent any error in the
operation
of the auto answer function
and to
the incoming
call signal from the outside line. The
setting is for when using an answer phone for
which an incoming
call tone to the SLT terminal,
The auto answer
ensure
function
that the incoming
the outside
line from
econd
econd
2#:Keep
to @ second
3#: Keep to 1 &econd
for incoming
calls is set
call can be answered
which
also the incoming
on
it originates.
of the ringing
of the rinaina
etc. of a fixed length
status
status
of the ringing
status
of the ringing
status
call tone
O#:Synchronizing
-25
call signal, the time
is also shoh Hence
is synchronized
with
is necessary.
to the incoming
1 #: Expand
2#:Expand
to 50ms
to 1 OOms
3f:Expand
4#: Expand
to 15Oms
to 2OOms
5#: Expand
6f: Expand
7#:Exoand
to 250ms
to 300ms
to 350ms
8f: Expand
to 400ms
9#:Expand
1 O#:Expand
11 #:Expand
to 450ms
to 5OOms
to 550ms
12Y: Expand
13#: Expand
14#: Expand
to 600ms
to 650ms
to 700ms
15#: Expand
to 750ms
call signal
DBS
FF-1 System
FFl-3#-17#-(O-
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January
1990
mode
15)#
FFl-3#-18#-(0-
Dial pause timer
outside
line
for after
obtaining
10)#
PBX connecting
line flash time
starts after a connection
with an outside line has
been made is set
For example. even if you start dialing immediately
after pressing the line key, the dial signal is sent
out to the outside line only after the specified time
The time (flash time) is set for temporarily
releasing the outside line when the [FLASHI’key or
IREDIAL] key has been pressed upon using a PBX
line forthe outside line.
This is only effective when the outside line is set as
the PBX line.
The outside line is released while the [FLASH] key
has
This
tone
etc.
the time set for it
The time can be set within
seconds.
The time to when
sending
out the number
dialed
elapsed.
setting is for when there is a risk of the dialing
from the switchboard
of the connected
CO.,
being delayed or of a wrong connection
being
is pressed,
even though
this may be longer
in range of 0 - 1.l
made.
O#: 1.2 second after
1#: 1.2 second after
obtaining
obtaining
outside
outside
line
line
O#:No flash
1 #:Minimum
line flash time of 0.2 seconds
2#:2
3#:3
seconds after
seconds after
obtaining
obtaining
outside
outside
line
line
Z#:Minimum
3B:Minimum
4B:Minimum
line flash time of 0.3 seconds
line flash time of 0.4 seconds
line flash time of 0.5 seconds
4#:4
58:s
6#:6
seconds after
seconds after
seconds after
obtaining
obtaining
obtaining
outside
outside
outside
line
line
line
5#:Minimum
6#:Minimum
7#:Minimum
line flash time of 0.6 seconds
line flash time of 0.7 seconds
line flash time of 0.8 seconds
8#:Minimum
9#:Minimum
line flash time of 0.9 seconds
line flash time of 1.0 seconds
7#:7 seconds after obtaining
outside line
8#:8 seconds after obtaining
outside line
9#:9 seconds after obtaining
outside line
10s: 10 seconds after obtaining
outside line
11#: 1 I seconds after
12#: 12 seconds after
obtaining
obtaining
outside
outside
line
line
13#: 13 seconds after
14#:14 seconds after
obtaining
obtaining
outside
outside
line
line
15#: 15 seconds
obtaining
outside
line
after
lo&Minimum
-26-
than
line flash time of 1.1 seconds
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
:
FFl-3#-19C(O-
3 -7 - 4 Remote Maintenance Code mode
15)#
Call forward No answer timer
If a call is not answered by an extension which has
call foward no answer set within the specified
ti’me period, the call will be diverted to a
predetermined extension. The call forward no
answer timer can be set from 4io 64 seconds. .
O#:Call forward
1#Xall forward
_Z#:Call forward
3$Kall forward
4#:Cail forward
S#:Call fomard
6#:cBll forward
7#:Call forward
S#:Call forward
9#:CaII forward
1O#:Call forward
Ffl - 4#-(0000 - 9999)#
Storing the ID for remote maintenance
Remote controlled maintenance for the system
can be done through a telephone circuit An 4
digit code is stored for this purpose.
The system first automatically answers a call
coming in on the exclusive DISA line.
Then, after the intercom dialing tone has been
sent out by the system, the stored code is input
and the remote maintenance starts.
For actually effecting the remote maintenance, in
addition to this setting it is also necessary to store
the DISA code.
For remote maintenance 3 of the following
operations indicated are possible.
A: Remote programming:
Set remotely as with normal programming.
B: Program data list out:
The programmed data are checked when
irregularities in the operation occur.
c:
System installation list:
The terminals connected to the system
togetherwith
the types and number of
mounted cards are checked.
after 4 Seconds
after 8 Seconds
after 12 Seconds
after 16 Seconds
after 20 Seconds
after 24 Seconds
after 32 Seconds
after 36 Seconds
after 40 Seconds
after 44 Seconds
after 52 Seconds
l
Clear to DATA (Initial = 9999)
[CONF]#:
(0000 - 9999)#: Remote maintenance can be done
according to stored code.
Note:
-27-
To l nabie the use of the D&4 function it is
necessary to set the exclusive DISA line to
an outside line port separately.
DBS
FF-1 System
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January
mode
3 - I - 5 DISA ID Code mode
FFl-6#-Z#-(OOOO
- 9999)#
DISA Outgoing
FFl-5#-(0000
- 9999)#
DISA ID code storing
(Direct inward System
Use of the DISA function
dialing) from outside’the
Access)
allows for DID (Direct
system and DISA
in
using this function
line via
If *is ID code is not set then system accept the
DISA call withoutthe
input ID cod, It also enables
remote maintenance
through
a telephone
circuit
by the installer of the system.
Forthese operations
it is necessary to input the
Clear
(0000 - 9999)#:
The DISA function
can be used
according
to the stored code.
Clear to data (Initial
(0000- 9999)C:
To enable the use of the DISA
function
it is necessary to set the
exclusive DISA line to an outside
3 - I- 7 System
FFl-7#-(0000
data
[CONF]#:
(0000- 9999)#:
call ID code 1 storing
Clearto
programming
an code is stored.
data (Initial
ID code storing
is oniy possible
set can be deleted
with
the
[CONF]#:
Clear to data (Initial
(0000 9999)#:
System can be programmed
according
to the stored code.
= 9999).
outside.
Note:
= 1111).
Another
extension
telephone
can’t program
before the extension
telephone
which
programmed
To enable the use of the DISA
function
it is necessary to set the
excfusive
- 9999)#
The codes already
[CONa key.
- 9999)C
For using this function
ID code mode
is the most part of the system, always be sure to
record it in the setting table (Section 450) and pay
sufficient
attention
when dealing with the codes.
Call ID mode
line via the system from
= 9999).
But by inputting
this code, the system can also be
programmed
from another extension.
The code is stored for the system. As the program
By inputting
the stored code when DISA is
operating,
it is possible to make a call from a
different
proqram
Normally system programming
from the attendant’s
phone.
To enable the use of the DISA function
it is
necessaty to set the exclusive DiSA line to
an outside line port separately.
DISA Outgoing
an code is stored.
[CONF]#:
System
IC~NF~A:
FFl-6#-I#-(0000
storing
line port separately.
exclusive DISA code followed
by the remote
maintenance
code, DISA outgoing
call code, etc.
3 - ? - 6 DISA Outqoinq
call ID code.2
By inputting
the stored code when DISA is
operating,
it is possible to make a call from a
different
line via the system from outside.
For
outgoing
call (making a call on a different
the system from outside).
Note:
3.0)
1990
DISA line to an outside
line port separately.
-2%
cancel
the programming
mode.
SECTION 400 (Version 3-O)
issue 1 January 1990
FF-2 Trunk
3 - 2 Trunk mode
[Outside
line port specificationl
-FFZ-(l - 32)#-.4#-(0
or l)#
i -Sl
This is set for when an outside line port connected
to the system has been damaged or for when it is
--
O#: Operate
using the function
for obtaining
an outside
line automatically,
a line belonging
to the trunk
groupto
be accessed is set. When 81 is dialed,
connection
is automatically
made with a vacant
Trunk prohibition
desired to stop functioning
lines for some reason.
or 1)#
Pooledtrunk accessGroup 81
When
FFZ-(l -32)#-l#-(O
DBS
mode
line in the set group.
.
to.specificoutside
OR:
Not subiectto
1#:
Accessible
Pooled
through
trunk
Group
access Group
81
81
(Default)
1 #c: Stop Operation
FF2-(1-
32)#-
S#-(O or I)#
Pooledtrunk accessGroup 82
FF2-(l-
32)#-
2#-(0
or l)#
Same as group
81
Dialing signal type set for outside line
Dialing
is done
by pressing
the 10 keys. But it is
also possible to specify whether
it is to be pulse
dialing or DTMF signal dialing for each outside line
port in conformity
with the specifications
line connected
to the ports..
for the
0#:
Not subiectto
I#:
Accessible
FF2-(1-
32)#-
6#-(0
or I)#
81
0%:
Notsubiectto
l#:
Accessible
Pooled
through
trunk
access Group
83
Group 83
(0 or l)#
Pooledtrunk accessGroup 9
When
82
dial
1#: IOpps pulse dial
FFZ-(I - 32)#-3#-
Group
Pooledtrunk accessGroup 83
Same as group
0#: DTMF sional
trunk access Grow 82
Pooled
through
using the function
FF2-(1- 32)#- 7#40 or I)#
for obtaining
Pooledtrunk accessGroup 84
an outside
a line belonging
to the trunk
group to be accessed is set When 9 is dialed,
Same as group 81
connection
is automatically
line in the set group.
OR: Not subiectto Pooled trunk access Grout
l#: Accessible through Group 84
line automatically,
made
with
a vacant
O#: Not subject to Pooled trunk access dial 9
1 A: Accessible throuoh
Pooled trunk access dial 9
84
32)#- 8#40 or l)#
Pooledtrunk accessGroup 85
FF2-(1-
Same as group 81
Note :
For using this function
it is necessa+y to set
for the pooled trunk access as opposed
to
the 1 CR call in the system program.
Even with the L CR call set, however,
if all
the trunk lines for LCR calls are busy, it
becomes
an pooled
trunk
O#:
Not subiectto
l#:
Accessible
FFZ-(l - 32)#-
9#-(0
Pooled
through
trunk
Group
access Grout
85
85
or I)#
Pooledtrunk accessGroup 86
access.
Same as group 81
O#: Not subiect to Pooled trunk access G~OUD 86
1%: Accessible through Group 86
-29-
_. DBS
FF-2 Trunk
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
mode
FF2-(1 - 32)# - lO#k:$?
Connected
FF2-(1-
phone
line type setting
32)#-13#-(0
Auto
- I)#
pause function
setting.for
Asthe dialing decision for TRS and the like is
affected if the system is connected
to a PBX,
either a PBX line or a CO. line is set for each trunk
It is set whether
or not a auto
dialing done with the system
or not
l#:
0#: Auto
1 R: Auto
CO. line
2%: PBX line (Need to access numberto
FF2-(l-
32)Pl
l#-(0
PBX line
pause for each
setting is necessary
pause for each dialing not necessary
cause function
for each dialina
CO line)
or l)#
FF2-(1- 32)#-14#-
DISA Ijne setting
(Automatic
DISA answer)
Dialing
(0 or 1)s
tone
It is set whether
detected when
This setting is each trunk port to receive incoming
calls using the DISA functionHowever
you may
detection
setting
or not the dialing
making an outside
tone is to be
call.
need to set DISA start and end times to each trunk.
If it is set, the number dialed is not transmitted
to
the out- side line until the dialing tone has been
OR:
Does not answer
detected.
If it is not set, the
l#:
Answers
DISA incomino
DISA incoming
accommodates
FF2-(1 - 32)#-12#-(01
Private
calls and also
outgoing
calls from
accordance
with
number
the setting
O#:Need the dialina tone
1 #:No dial tone detection
(Private
outside
can have an exclusive
dialing
for the system timer.
for the dial out
(Free dial)
line)
private
line
FF2-(1-
15#-( 1 - 3)#
The length
use rings on the extension
to which that line’
belongs only.
While there can be a number of private lines
belonging
to one telephone,
a single private
cannot belong in common to a number of
32)#-
DTMF dial signal
which can be set when programming.
An incoming
call from a trunk line set for private
sending
of time for sending
various
services.
even if the private
3#t: 250ms ON / 250ms OFF
is canceled
it
is not make calls or receive calls automatically.
In this case set TRS and RING separately.
lCONF]#:
No orivate
(01 - 72)#:
Private
line
line for set extension
the signal is
is
time for the DTMF signal is short and it does not
operate when receiving
the MCl or SPRINT line or
line
l#:
2#:
line setting
time
changed in cases where a DTMF dialing signal
sent to an outside line, and where the sending
telephones.
Once set, other extensions
can not make calls to or
receive calls from that trunk port number, and
trunk
is out in
DISA
- 72)#
line setting
Each extension
calls
port
-3o-
75ms ON / 50ms OFF
125ms ON I 125mr OFF
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
FF2-(l-
3.0)
or l)#
32)#-16#-(0
FF2-(1-32)#-18#-
Call Diversion
trunk to trunk connection.
This function
can be used at an extension
trunk to trunk connection
extension
mode.
O#: Trunk
l#: Trunk
where
has been set in the
accommodated
by this setting.
The time from when it is determined
FFZ-(1 - 32)#-17#-(0
connection
connection
it
been cut off, the system automatically
cancels the
outside line call. However, as the call ends
automatically
when the outside line is instantly cut
due to the conditions
for the connected
PBX, it is
cut off.
to trunk
to trunk
-
15)#
If the signal indicating
that an outside line has
been disconnected
during a outside call or while
is on hold is received, or if the outside line has
if the time set with the call
timer is exceeded, the call is
automatically
(I-
Outside line disconnectsignal detection
timer
(Trunk to trunk connection
trunk setting)
tt is set whether
or not an outside line can make a
In addition,
monitoring
DBS
mode
FF-2 Trunk
not possible
possible
that the call
has been disconnected
orthat it has been disabled
to when the outside line call status is
automatically
canceled
range of 50 - 750ms.
- 9)#
can be set within
the
Incoming ring signal pattern setting
The ring tone
pattern
for incoming
(%&No
calls can be
detection
(Keep the connection)
changed for each trunk port
If outside lines are assigned for use to each
individual,
they will know who the call is for by
the ring tone pattern and this will facilitate
19:Dixonnection
2#:Dixonnection
3#:Disconnection
4b:Dixonnection
bythe
by the
by the
by the
answering.
S#:Disconnection
6#: Disconnection
7#:Disconnection
bythe more than 250ms signal
by the more than 300ms signal
bv the more than 350ms siqnal
8#:Dixonnection
9#:Dixonnection
by the more than 400ms signal
by the more than 450ms signal
O#: lncominq
rinq tone svnchronized
1#:3secON/l
secOFF
2%:2secON/Zsec
OFF
38: 1 set ON I1 set OFF
4#: 1 set ON / 2 set OFF
59: 1 set ON / 3 set OFF
6#: 0.5 set ON / 0.5 set OFF
b 7#: 0.5 set ON IO.5 set OFF
and O.Ssec ON 12.5 set OFF
8#:0.5secON/3.5sec
9t:
morethan
50msrignal
more than lOOms signal
more than 150ms signal
more than 2OOms signal
1 O#:Dixonnection
1 1 #: Disconnection
128:Disconnection
by the more than 500mr signal
by the more than 550ms signal
by the more than 600ms signal
13#:Dixonnection
bythe
14Y:Dixonnection
158:Disconnection
by the more than 700ms signal
bythe more than 750ms signal
more than 650ms signal
OFF
1 set ON / 7 set OFF
-31-
\
x41
3
DBS
FF-2 Trunk
FF2-(l-
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
mode
32)#-19#-(Hour
- Minute)#
DISA start time setting
A
CO line can be assigned
as a DISA (direct
inward
system access) line for a specific period of time.
When the outside line is not activated
by this timer
as a DISA line it can be used as a normal outside
line. This timer specifies the stating time for D&4.
The time entered is in 24 hour format with no
spaces between
hour and minute.
JCONFl#: No startina
HHMM#:(OO-23,00-59)
FF2-(l-
32)C20#-(0
time (DATA reset)
Enterthe
time
or l)#
DISA end time setting
This timer
normal
inward
specifies
the ending
time
for DlSk
A
CO line can be assigned as a DISA (direct
system access) line for a specific period of
time. When the outside line is not activated
as a
DISA line it can be used as a normal outside line.
The time entered is in 24 hour format with no
spaces between hour and minute.
JCONFj#:
No end timi(DATA
HHMM#:(OO-23,00-59)
Enterthe
reset)
time
-32-
DBS
FF-3 Extension mode
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
3 - 3 Extension mode
General operating
specificationsareset for the
FF3-(1- 72)#:2#-(1-
extensions,
and these specifications
are set for
each port number in the main cabinet with regard
to each extension.
FF3-(l -72)#-l#-(loo-699)#
.
Extension number
Extension numbers are stored for the extension
portJ.
The extensi-on numbers set in the system program
are stored separately according to the number of
digits (2 or 3 digits).
If there are more than 60 extension units
connected to the system, it is necessary to have
extension numbers with 3 digits. But if EM/24 and
DSSunits are included among those connected, it
is not necessary to store extension numbers for
them.
If alternate attendant mode is set, the extension ,9
numbers 100 (or 10) is attendant phone 1 and 101 u
(or 11) is attendant phone 2. If they have not been
specially stored, the system automatically stores
extensions 100,101 and 102from extension port
number 1.
[CONF]:
I1 00 - 699)#:
141%
Terminal’type
DATA reset
100 to 699 (if 2 digits: 10 to 69)
The types of terminal (telephones, etc.) connected
to the extension ports are stored. When the
power source for the system is turned on after
installation, except for OPX and DSS/72 terminals
connected to the system are already automatically
set and OPX and DSS/72 terminals connected to
the system need initial setting.
DSSl, DSW for 1st attendant and DSS3, DSS4for
2nd attendant
1#:Analog tone telephone (2500type)
2#:6 FF key
digital keytelephone
3#: 12 FF key digital key telephone
4#:24 FF key digital key telephone
5#:
Reserved
6#:
Reserved
7#: EM/24
VB-43310
8#:OPX
(Pulse dial detection)
(Tone dial detection)
9R:OPX
klO#: Voice mail (with AEC)
11#:DSSlforexL#lO0or10
12#:DSS2forexL#lOOorlO
13#: DSS3 for eti # 101 or 11
14#: D554for ext # 101 or 11
1S#:Voice mail (with OPX)
(16 to 20 is Reserved)
2l#:ACD/ PC
(21 to28isACD/PC)
,’
288:ACDIPC
29#:
Reserved
.
3OP: Reserved
.
31#:kklPC
(16to2OisAA./PC)
28P: AA. I PC
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
set
set
set
set
Auto
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manuai
Manual
Manual
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
Note : As regards DSSi72 and EMJ24, after they
have been stored, it is necessary either to
turn the system power
off and then
turn it
on again, or to disconnect
the module
jacks for DSS,EM24 and then insert them
once
-33-
more.
DBS
FF-3 Extension
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
mode
FF3-(1- 72)#-3#-(01-
72)#
FF3-(1- 72)#-6#-
(0001 - 9999)#
EM/24 user-port number
Station lockout key code storing
Extension ports are stored for operating
extensions
connected to them and for the
If you do not want other
calls from your extension
connected
extension, this functions
can be prevented.
A key code is stored for each extension,
and this
EM/24 console
and stored.
ICONFIR:
EM/24 not connected
(01 - 72)#:
Operates
Note :
As regards
as EM/24 for stored
EM124, after
key code is input to cancel the station lockout
function upon returning
to ones desk.
extension
Key codes can be stored within
- 9999 and deleted by inputting
they have been
stored, it is necessary either to tom the
system power off and then turn it on again,
or to disconnect the module jacks for EM124
and then insert
. ICONFIB:
No station
(0000 - 9999)f:
72)#4#-(0
Forced Least Cost Routing restriction
is for specifying
made from
The sening
extensions must be through
is such that, while managers
that outside
It is stored
indicating
calls
LCR
and the
Extension
,O#:
18:
calls need not be made bv LCR
calls must be made by LCR
’
- 72)#-S#-(O
l#:Have
This setting is so that outside calls cannot be made
from the extensions programmed
for this if the
account code is not entered.
Note
l#:Orderto
or l)#
Port 1,2 (Attendant
outside
tel)
1.:
rino when
the incoming
phone
ring when
For the incoming
is busy
phone
is busy
w/i signal,
the off-
hooksignal
volume and off-hook
signaiing
pattern are set separately.
code TRS function
ID code for making
for each extension
whether
a signal
an incoming
call on an outside line is to
Another
pon
O#:No incomina
or I)#
account
key code
No incoming
ring when phone is busy
Have the incomino
rino when phone is busy
Account code TRS setting
O#:No
lockout
tine key on the telephone.
them.
FF3+
station
function
be sent while the extension
is-busy. Even if set for
this, however,
this signal will not be sent during a
conference
call, while the extension
is on hold, or
during a call on a outside line for which there is no
like can use another line when the LCR line is busy,
other staff members must use LCR for making calls
at all times. When LCR calls are made from set
extensions by dialing 9, it is possible to restrict
Outside
Outside
lockout
of 0000
Off-book signal setting
or 1)#
This setting
OB:
1#:
Storing
the range
[CONF].
them once more.
FF3-(1- 72)#-7#-(0
FF3-(l -
people to make,outside
when you leave at your
When off-hook
signal setting is done,
hunting
function
is not available.
line call
-34-
SECTION 400 D/ersion
Issue 1 January 1990
FF3-( 1 - 72)#-8#-(0
.
3.0)
DBS
mode
FF-3 Extension
or l)#
FF3-(1-
72)#-1 l#-(O or 1)s
Callwaiting accept setting
Prime line pick-up
When a call is received‘from
another
extension
while the extension
is busy, the busy tone is sent
to the former.
However, this sets whether
call waiting
is to be
It is possible to have a setting for when making an
outside call to automatically
pick up an outside
line stored in the FFl key simply by lifting the
handset
However, this function
will not operate if
accepted or not when
again and call waiting
the outside line has not been stored in the FFl key.
If Polled trunk access function
has been set in the
accepting,
extension.
the 131 key has been input
effected.
If set for
the incoming
call signal is sent from the
But call waiting
cannotbe accepted by
FFl key, an available
line is automatically
accessed
by moving down in order from the extension
port
an extension which is set for absence, on hold,
receiving a call or involved in a conference
call.
with the largest number. As intercom
calls cannot
be made with this setting however,
” #8”
[intercom
call key] should
key beforehand.
0#: Not accepting
call waiting
1R: Acceotina
call waitinq
O#: No prime
FF3-(l-
72)#-9#-(0
Busy
or l)#
be stored
in another
FF
line function
I#: To pick up prime
line
override call possibility setting
This sets for each extension whether
is possible while it is in use.
busy override
FF3-(1-
involved
in a conference
0#: Busy override
l#: Busy override
By simply
call imoossible
call possible
O#:
1%:
setting
(Busy overridden)
extension
or to reject
calls made
from
another
it
call rejected
call accepted
the first of a number
is selected
to trunk
(Make
no attended
-35-
connection
whether
conference)
to allow
by
\&+
for a trunk
4
“/
to trunk
the two parties on outside
- party conference
call by
the line key for either
O#: Trunk to trunk
l#: Trunk to trunk
Note:
simply
or I)#
Trunk
pressing
and
selection to ringing trunk
select the rinaino trunk
connection
between
lines during a three
Note : It is possible to have the setting so that the
signal will sound during busy override to
indicate another busy override call.
pickup
can also be such that hold recall and
No automatic
Automaticallv
This specifies
0#: Busy override
l#: Busv override
the handset,
trunk
FF3-U - 72)#-13#-(0
busy override
ring trunk
transferred
calls can also be answered
lifting the handset
FF3-( 1 - 72)#-1 OR- (0 or l)#
This sets to accept
or l)#
lifting
of incoming
answered.
The setting
call.
override rejection
72)#-12k(0
Automatic incoming
Note that busy override
is not possible when an
extension is set for rejecting
it or by an extension
Busy
setting
connection
connection
of the outside
lines.
not oossible
possible
This function should be set to enable trunk
to trunk connection on outside lines
beforehand.
DBS
IT-3 Extension
FF3-(l -
mode
72)#-74#-(0
or l)#
FF3-U - 72)#-19#-(0
or I)#
SMDRprintout setting
Paging
This sets whether information
from outside calls is
to be printed out by the SMDR (Station Message
Dial Recorder) printer.
This setj to paging
group
01 affiiiation
group
O#: Does not belonu
If:
Belongsto
to oaoino
paging
group
orouo
01
01
cNrEold~
0#:
l#:
E&nipll
lncomlns
is not printed out
call is printed out
FF3-(1- 72)#-20#-(0
or l)#
Paging’group
02 affiliation
This sets t0 paging
Note:
For SMDR printing it is necessary to set the
protocol between the system and SMDR
and the control data beforehand.
0#:
FF3-(1-
Off-hook signal volume
The off-hook
signal
group
Does not belona
72)#-21
Pagiag
’
to oaoina
minimum
lower medium
3#: Off-hook
48: Off-hook
signal
signal
higher medium
maximum
FF3-(1 - 72)#-16#-(0
volume
volume
1#: Belongs
group
Paging
pattern
Continuitv
1#:
incoming
03
04 affiiiation
04 or not
group
O#: Does not belono to oaoino arouo
1#: Belongs to paging group 04
04
is set
FF3-(1-
O#:
group
ctrouo 03
or l)#
This sets to paging
or 1)#
signal
group
03 or not
to oasino
to paging
FF3-(1- 72)P22#-(0
W-hook signal pattern
The off-hook
02
03 affiliation
O#: Does not belonq
signal volume
signal-volume
qrouo
#t-(0 or l)#
group
This sets to paging
can be set at 4types.
1#: Off-hook
2#: Off-hook
02 or not
1#: Belongs to paging group 02
FF3-(1- 72)#-1 S#-(0 or 4)#
72)#-23#-(0
or I)#
Paginggroup 05 affiliation
call signal
This sets to paging
is sent out once only
group
O#: Does not belonq
FF3-(1-
01 or not
72)#-li#-(0
or l)#
OS or not
to oaaina
1%: Belongs fo paging
group
qroun
OS
05
Personalspeed dial display mode
This specifies
the quantity
of names displayed
on
FF3-(l-
the Large display phone. The option is for 5 names
or 10 names the maximum
length displayed will be
7 characters.
OR: Disolav
18: Display
08:
FF3-(1-
l#:
1 t: Belongs
to paging
to oaaina
group
arouo
to oaainq
00
00
-36-
group
arouo
06
06
group 07 affiliation
group
OR: Does not belonq
00 or not
06 or not
or I)#
This sets to paging
Paging group 00 affiliation
O#: Does not Selona
group
to paging
72)#-25#-(0
Paging
group
06 affiliation
Does not belono
18: Belongs
or t)#
This sets to paging
or 1)#
group
This sets to paging
5 names (1 line have 1 names)
10 names (f line have 2 names)
FF3-(1 -72)#-18#-(0
72)#-24#-(0
Paging
Belongs
to paging
07 or not
to oaqina
group
urouo
07
07
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
FF3-(l -
72)#-26#-(0
3.0)
FF-3 Extension
DES
mode
- 13)#
Large LCD information
idle status (Idol) .
condition on the
The contents are set for display on a large LCD
when the extension
is in the idle (On hook) status.
O#:
l#:
No chancre
Change to menu
1 l#:
28:
3#:
Change
Change
to personal speed dial index
to system speed dial index
(BGM,DND, REMDR,ABSES,CFWD,MUTE,
LKOUT,MAIL,BROD,ABS-CSL)
12#:Changetofunction
2
48:
5#:
Change
Change
to extension
to guidance
(DT,HS, MSGE-CSLMSGE-CSL,
13#: Change to function
3
6#:
(ABSES, AC-CODE,LKOUT,REMDR,FF-Key)
Change to guidance
menu 2
7#:
(KD,CFWD/AII
call/No ans/On
Change to guidance
menu 3
88:
(PGM,PKHLD,DND,SVDI,SGM)
Change to guidance menu
information
index
menu
1
busy/Out
4 (Attendant
(Timer set,Timer adjust,
Attendant
cancel,Day/
Night)
9isc: Change to guidance
menu S (Attendant
(SSD name number,EXT
name number
mode.Outgoing
Incoming
amount,Use
to function
1
CONF)
side)
(PGANS,Page-Ul/2/3/4/5/6i7,
All Zone)
14#: Change to function
4
(CONF,TONE,Set
MSG.fRFR,RLSE)
only)
15#: Change to function
5
(SADl/REDl/DTMFCV/RLSE,AC-CODE,MUTE)
16#: Change to function
6
(C-WATNG,MSGE,CO-QNG,OVRDE,RLSE)
17#: Change to function
7
only)
(AC-CODE,LCR.TRK-G/81/82/83/84/85186)
18#: Change to function
8
Maintenance
code,Key code,DISA code)
10#: Change to guidance
menu 6 (Attendant
only)
(Program
Change
19f:
amount
(UNA-PUPfGroup/DirecUPage)
Change to function 9
(MCO, LCR. KD,SSD,
20#: Change to function
SSD amount)
EXT,MUTE,PAGE,TONE)
10
(MSGE,TRFR,RLSE,CONF,MUTE,DND,TONE,
PKHLD)
21#: Change to function
11
(REDLDTMFCV,
AC-CODE,SSD,KD,RLSE,MUTE.EXT)
22%: Change to function 12
(SADI,KD,SSD,CONF,
AC-CODE,MUTE,RLSE,TRFR,REMDR)
23#: Change to function
13
(PGANS,HS,~ONE,MUTE,~NA,EXT,PSD,SSD)
24#: Change
to function
14
(TAKBK.RLSE,CONF,TRFR,DND,PKHLD)
-37-
DBS
FF-3 Extension
FF3-(1- 72)#-27#-
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
mode
(0 - 13)#
Large LCD information
dial tone status (IDT)
on the intercom
The contents are set for display
when the extension
is involved
tone (off hook) status.
on a large LCD
in an intercom dial
08:
l#:
2%:
No chanoe
Change to menu information
Change to personal speed dial index
1 l#:
38:
4%:
5#:
Change
Change
Change
(ABSES,
lt#:
6#:
78:
8%:
9#:
Change to function
2
(DT,HS, MSGE-CSL,MSGE-CSL,
13#: Change to function
3
(PGANS,Page-Z/1/2/3/4/5/6/7,
to system speed dial index
to extension
index
to guidance
menu 1
AC-CODE,LKOUT,REMDR,FF-Key)
Change to guidance
menu 2
(PSD,CFWD/AII
call/No ans/On
Change to guidance
menu
(PGM,PKHLD,DND,SVDI,BGM)
Change to guidance
menu
(Timer set,Timer adjust
busy/Out
All Zone)
15%: Change to function
5
(SADI/REDUDTMFCV/RLSE,AC-CODE,MUTE)
3
only)
Attendant
cancel,Day/
Night)
Change to guidance
menu 5 (Attendant
only)
16#: Change to function
6
(C-WATNG,MSGE,CO-QNG,OVRDE,RLSE)
17%: Change to function
7
(AC-CODE,LCR,TRK-C/81/82/83/84/85/86)
18#: Change to function
8
(UNA-PUPIGroup/DirecWF+age)
name number
code,DISA code)
108: Change to guidance
menu 6 (Attendant
(Program
mode,Outgoing
amount
incoming
amount,Use
SSD amount)
CONF)
14W: Change to function
4
(CONF,TONE,Set
MSC,TRFR.RLSE)
side)
4 (Attendant
(SSD name number,EXT
Maintenance
code,Key
Change to function
1
(BGM,DND, REMDRmSES,CFWD,MUTE,
LKOUT,MAIL,BROD,ABS-CSL)
19#: Change to function
9
(MCO, LCR, PSD,SSD, EXT,MUTE,PAGE,TONE)
2O#c: Change to function
10
(MSGE,TRFR,RLSE,CONF,MUTE,DND,TONE,
only)
21+:
PKHLD)
Change to function
11
(REDI,DTMFCV.
AC-CODE,SSD,PSD,RUE,MUTE,EXT)
228:
23#:
24#:
-38-
Change to function
12
(SADI.PSD,SSD,CONF,
AC-CODE,MUTE,RLSE.TRFR.REMDR)
Change to function
13
(PGANS,HS,TONE,MUTE,UNA,EXT,PSD,SSD)
Change to function
14
(TAKBK,RLSE,CONF,TRFR,DND,PKHLD)
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
FF3-( 1 - 72)#-28#-(0
3.0)
FF-3 Extension
- 13)#
Large LCD information
call status (lNT Talk)
on the intercom
The contents are set for display
when the extension
is involved
(Caliing,Receiving
conversation,Making
on a large LCD
in an intercom
call
call,On the
the call waiting)
status.
08:
No chanae
1 l+: Change
l#:
Ulange to menu information
2#:
3#:
Change
Change
to personal speed dial index
to system speed dial index
(BGM,DND,
REMDR,ABSE5,CFWD,MUTE,
LKOUT,MAIL,BROD,ABS-C5L)
12#: Change to function
2
4#:
5#:
Change
Change
to extension
to guidance
6#:
(ABSES,
Change
AC-CODE,LKOUT,REMDR,FF-Key)
to guidance
menu 2
index
menu
8#:
9#:
(Timer set,Timer adjust,
Attendant
cancel,Day/
Night)
Change to guidance
menu 5 (Attendant
(SSD name number,EXT
Maintenance
code,Key
10#: Change
(Program
incoming
to guidance
side)
6 (Attendant
1
CONF)
All Zone)
(CONF,TONE,Set
MSG,TRFR,RLSE,MUTE)
158: Change to function
5
only)
(SADl/REDl/DTMFCV/RLSE,AC-CODE,MUTE)
16#: Change to function
6
(C-WATNG,MSGE,CO-QNG,OVRDE,RLSE)
only)
17#: Change to function
7
(AC-CODE,LCR,TRK-G/81/82/83/84/85/86)
18#: Change to function
8
name number
code,DISA code)
menu
to function
(DT,HS, MSGE-CSL,MSGE-CSL,
13#: Change to function
3
(PGANS,Page-Z/l/2/3/4/5/6/7,
14#: Change to function
4
1
(PSD,CFWD/AII
call/No ans/On busy/Out
Change to guidance
menu 3
(PCM,PKHLD,DND,SVDI,BCM)
Change to guidance
menu 4 (Attendant
7#:
DBS
mode
(UNA-PUPIGroup/Direct/Page)
19#: Change to function
9
only)
mode,Outgoing
amount
amount,Use
SSD amount)
(MCO, LCR, PSD, SSD, EXT,MUTE,PAGE,TONE)
20#: Change to function
10
(MSGE,TRFR,RLSE,CONF,MUTE,DND,TONE,
PKHLD)
21#: Change to function
11
(REDLDTMFCV,
AC-CODE,SSD,PSD,RLSE,MUTE,EXT)
22#: Change to function
12
(SADI,PSD,SSD,CONF,
AC-CODE,MUTE,RKE,TRFR,REMDR)
23#: Change to function
13
24#:
(PGANS,HS,TONE,MUTE,UNA,EXT,PSD,SSD)
Change to function
14
(TAKBK.RLSE,CONF,TRFR,DND,PKHLD)
-39-
DBS
n-3 Extension
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
mode
FF3-( 1 - 72)#- 29#-(0 - 13)#
Large LCD information
corkersation
(In dialing)
on the outside
status
line
The contents are set for display on a large LCD
when the extension is getthe
outside line.
08:
l#:
No chanae
Change to menu
2#:
3~.:
4#:
58:
Change
Change
to personal speed dial index
to system speed dial index
LKOUT,MAlL,BROD,A8S-CSL)
12%: Change to function
2
to extension index
to guidance
menu 1
AC-CODE.LKOUT,REMDR,FF-Key)
to guidance
menu 2
(DT,HS, MSGE-CSL,MSGE-CSL,
13B: Change to function
3
6#:
Change
Change
(ABSES,
Change
7#:
(PSD,CFWD/AII call/No ans/On
Change to guidance
menu 3
8#:
1 l#:
information
(PGANS,Pag&/1/2/3/4/5/6/7,
14#: Change to function
4
busy/Outside)
(PGM,PKHLD,DND,SVDI,BGM)
Change to guidance
menu 4 (Attendant
(Timer setTimer
adjust,
Attendant
cancel,Day/
Night)
CONF)
All Zone)
(CONF,TONE,Set
MSG,TRFR,RLSE,MUTE)
15#: Change to function
5
(SADVREDI/DTMFCVlRLSE,AC-CODE,MUTE)
16#: Change to function
6
(C-WATNG,MSGE,CO-QNG,OVRDE,RLSE)
17#: Change to function
7
only)
9#:
Change to guidance
menu S (Attendant
only)
(SSD name number,EXT
name number
Maintenance
code,Key code,DISA code)
10%: Change to guidance
menu 6 (Attendant
only)
(Program
Incoming
Change to function
1
(BGM,DND, REMDR,ABSES,CFWD,MUTE.
(AC-CODE.LCR,TRK-G/81/82/83/84/85/86)
18#: Change to function
8
(UNA-PUPJGroup/Direct/Page)
19#:Changetofunction9
mode.Outgoing
amount
amount,Use
SSD amount)
200:
(MCO,LCR,PSD,SSD,
EXT,MUTE.PAGE,TONE)
Change to function
10
(MSGE,TRFR,RUE,CONF,MUTE,DND,TONE,
PKHLD)
218: Change to function
11
(REDLDTMFCV,
AC-CODE,SSD,PSD,RUE,MUTE,EXT)
22#: Change to function
12
(SADI,PSD,SSD,CONF,
AC-CODE,MUTE,RLSE,TRFR,REMDR)
-4O-
23f:
Change to function
13
(PGANS,HS,TONE,MUTE,UNA.EXT,PSD,SSD)
24#:
Change to function
14
(TAKEK,RLSE,CONF,TRFR,DND,PKHLD)
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
FF3-( 1 - 72)#-
30#-(0
3.0)
FF-3 Extension
- 13)#
LargeLCD information on the outside line
conversation (After dialing) status
..
The contents are set for display on a large LCD
when the extension
started the outside line
conversation.
1 l#:
0#:
No chanae
I#:
2%:
3#:
4#:
Change
Change
Change
Change
5#:
Change to guidance
menu 1
(ABSES, AC-CODE,LKOUT,REMDR,FF-Key)
6#:
7#:
8#:
9#:
to
to
to
to
Change to guidance
menu
(PGM,PKHLD,DND,SVDI,BCM)
Change to guidance
menu
(Timer set,Timer adjust,
busy/Out
Attendant
cancel,Day/
Night)
Change to guidance
menu 5 (Attendant
(SSD name number,EXT
Maintenance
code,Key
amount,Use
6 (Attendant
amount
1
13#: Change to function
3
(PGANS,Page-Zfll2/3I4/56/7,
148: Change to function
4
CONF)
All Zone)
side)
(CONF,TONE,Set
MSG,TRFR,RLSE,MUTE)
15#: Change to function
5
(SADl/REDl/DTMFCV/RlSE,AC-CODE,MUTE)
only)
16#: Change to function
6
(C-WATNG,MSGE,CO-QNG,OVRDE.RLSE)
only)
171: Change to funczion 7
(AC-C00E,LCR,TRK-GiB1/82/83/84/85I86)
only)
18#: Change to function
8
(UNA-PUPJGroup/Direct/Page)
19#: Change to function
9
name number
code,DISA code)
1O#: Change to guidance
menu
(Program
mode,Outgoing
to function
(DT,HS, MSGE-CSL,MSGE-CSL,
3
4 (Attendant
Change
(BGM,DND,
REMDR,ABSES,CFWD.MUTE,
LKOUT,MAIL,BROD,ABS-CSL)
12%: Change to function
2
menu information
personal speed dial index
system speed dial index
extension
index
Change to guidance
menu 2
(PSD,CNVD/AII
call/No ans/On
incoming
DBS
mode
20t:
SSD amount)
2lf:
(MCO, LCR, PSD,SSD, EXT,MUTE.PAGE,TONE)
Change to function
10
(MSGE,TRFR,RLSE,CONF,MUTE,DND,TONE,
PKHLD)
Change
to function
11
(REDI,DTMFCV,
AC-CODE,SSD,PSD,RLSE,MUTE,EXT)
228:
Change to function
(SADI,PSD,SSD,CONF,
12
AC-CODE,MUTE,RUE.TRFR,REMDR)
23#: Change to function
13
24#:
(PGANS,HS,TONE,MUTE,UNA,EXT,PSD,SSD)
Change to function
14
(TAKBK,RLSE,CONF,TRFR,DND,PKHLD)
-4f-
DBS
FF-3 Extension
FF3-(l-
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
issue 1 January 1990
mode
72)#-31#-(O-
13)#
Large LCD information
page call status
on the receiving
The contents are set for display
when the extension is receiving
on a large LCD
the page call.
0#:
If:
No chance
Change to menu
t#:
3%:
4#:
S#:
Change
Change
Change
Change
6#:
(ABSES, AC-CODE,LKOUT,REMDR,FF-Key)
Change to guidance
menu 2
7#:
8f:
9#:
to
to
to
to
1 1#: Change
information
busy/Out
(SSD name
number,EXT
name
(PGANS,Page-UlNU4/5/6/7,
14#: Change to function 4
side)
lS#:
Change to guidance
menu 4 (Attendant
(Timer set,Timer adjust,
Anendant
cancel,Day/
Night)
Change to guidance
menu 5 (Attendant
amountUse
All Zone)
(CONF,TONE,Set
MSG,TRFR,RLSE,MUTE)
Change to function 5
(SADUREDUDTMFCV/RLSE,AC-CODE,MUTE)
only)
168: Change to function
6
(C-WATNG,MSGE,CO-QNG,OVRDE,RUE)
17#: Change to function
7
only)
(AC-CODE,LCR,TRK-W81/82/83/84/85/86)
18#: Change to function
8
number
Maintenance
code,Key code,DISA code)
lO#: Change to guidance
menu 6 (Attendant
only)
(Program mode,Outgoing
amount
Incoming
1
(BGM,DND, REMDR,ABSES,CFWD,MUTE,
LKOUT,MAIL,BROD,AB5-CL)
12f: Change to function 2
(DT,HS, MSGE-UL,MSGE-UL,
CONF)
139: Change to function 3
personal speed dial index
system speed dial index
extension
index
guidance
menu 1
(PSD,CFWD/AII call/No a&On
Change to guidance
menu 3
(PGM,PKHLD,DND,SVDI,BGM)
to function
(UNA-PUPJGroup/DirecUPage)
19#: Change to function 9
SSD amount)
20#:
(MCO, LCR,PSD,SSD, EXT,MUTE,PAGE,TONE)
Change to function
10
(MSGE,TRFR,RLSE,CONF,MUTE,DND,TONE,
21#:
PKHLD)
Change to function
(REDI,DTMFCV,
22f:
11
AC-CODE,55D,PSD,RLSE,MUTE,EXT)
Change to function
12
(5ADI,PSD,SSD,CONF,
AC-CODE,MUTE,RLSE,TRFR,REMDR)
23#: Change to function
13
(PGANS,HS,TONE,MUTE,UNA,EXT,PSD.SSD)
24#: Change to function
14
(TAKBK,RUE,CONF,TRFR,DND,PKHLD)
-42-
4!4
1
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
DBS
FF-3 Extension mode
FF3-(I- 72)#- 32#-(0 - l3)#
Large LCD information
call wait status
on the receiving
The contents are set for display on a large LCD
when the extension is receiving the call waiting.
O#:
l#:
28:
3%:
OR:
5#:
No chanae
Change to menu information
Change to personal speed dial index
Change to system speed dial index
Change to extension index
Change to guidance menu 1
(ABSES,AC-CODE,LKOUT,REMDR,FF-Key)
6#: Change to guidance menu 2
(PSD,CFWD/AII calUNo ans/On busy/Out side)
7#: Change to guidance menu 3
(PGM,PKHLD,DND,SVDI,BGM)
8#: Change to guidance menu 4 (Attendant only)
(Timer set.,Timer adjust,
Attendant cancel,Day/ Night)
9#: Change to guidance menu 5 (Attendant only)
(SSDname number,EXT name number
Maintenance code,Key code,DlSA code)
10#: Change to guidance menu 6 (Attendant only)
(Program mode,Outgoing amount
Incoming amount,Use SSDamount)
11%: Change to function 1
.(BGM,DND, REMDR,ABSES,CFWD,MUTE,
LKOUT,MAk,BROD,ABS-CSL)
12#: Change to function 2
(DT,HS, MSGE-CSL,MSGE-CSL,CONF)
131: Change to function 3
(PGANS,Page-U1N6J7,
All Zone)
146: Change to function 4
(CONF,TONE,Set MSC,TRFR,RLSE,MUTE)
156: Change to function 5
(SADl/REDVDTMFCV/RLSE,AC-CODE,MUTE)
168: Change to function 6
(C-WATNG,MSGE,CO-QNG,OVRDE,RLSE)
171: Change to function 7
(AC-CODE,LCR,TRK-G/Bl/82/83/84/85/86)
18%: Change to function 8
(UNA-PUPIGrouplDirecWage)
19#: Change to function 9
(MCO, LCR, PSD, SSD, DCT,MUTE,PAGE,TONE)
20#: Change to function 10
(MSGE,TRFR,RLsE,CONF,MUTE,DND,lONE,
PKHLD)
2liF: Change to function 11
(REDLDTMFCV,
AC-CODE,SSD,PSD,RLSE,MUTE,U(T)
22f: Change to function 12
(SADI,PSD,SSD,CONF,
AC-CODE,MUTE,RLSE,TRFR,REMDR)
23#: Change to function 13
(PGANS,HS,TONE,MUTE,UNA,EXT,PSD,SSD)
24#: Change to function 14
(TAKBK,RLSE,CONF,TRFR,DND,PKHLD)
-43-
DBS
FF-3 Extension
FF3-(1 - 72)#-
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
mode
33#-(0
- 13)#
Large LCD information
receiving status
on the busy tone
The contents are set for display
when the extension
is receiving
tone.
on a large LCD
the intercom
busy
O#:
l#:
No chanoe
Change to menu
2%:
3#:
4#:
58:
Change
Change
Change
Change
6%:
(ABSES, AC-CODE,LKOUT,REMDR,FF-Key)
Change to guidance
menu 2
7#:
to
to
to
to
1 l#:
information
personal speed dial index
system speed’dial
index
extension
index
guidance
menu 1
(PSD,CRNDIAII
call/No a&On
Change to guidance
menu 3
(PGM,PKHLD,DND,SVDI,BGM)
busy/Out
LKOUT,MAIL,BROD,ABS-CSL)
12#: Change to function
2
(DT,HS, MSGE-CSL,MSGE-CSL,
13#: Change to function
3
(PGANS,Page-U1N,
14#: Change to function
side)
lS#:
8#:
Change to guidance
menu 4 (Attendant
(Timer se&Timer adju&
Attendant
cancel,Day / Night)
only)
9#:
Change to guidance
menu 5 (Attendant
(SSD name number,EXT
name number
only)
amountUse
CONF)
AR Zone)
4
(CONF,TONE,Set
MSG,TRFR,RLSE,MUTE)
Change to function
5
(SADVREDUDTMFCV/RLSE,AC-CODEMUTE)
16#: Change to function
6
(C-WATNG,MSGE,CQ-QNG,OVRDE,RLSE)
178: Change to function
7
(AC-CODE,LCR,TRK-G/81/82/83184/85/86)
1.8#: Change to function
8
(UNA-PUPJGroup/Direct/Page)
19#: Change to function
9
(MCO, LCR, PSD, SSD, EXT,MUTE,PAGE,TONE)
Maintenance
code,Key code,DISA code)
lO#: Change to guidance
menu 6 (Attendant
only)
(Program
mode,Outgoing
amount
incoming
Change to function
1
(BGM,DND, REMDR,ABSES,CFWD,MUTE,
SSD amount)
208:
Changeto
function
10
(MSGE,TRFR,RLSE,CONF,MUTE,DND,TONE,
PKHLD)
21#: Change to function
11
(REDLDTMFCV,
AC-CODE,SSD,PSD,RLSE,MUTE,EXT)
22#:
Change to function
(SADI,PSD,SSD,CONF,
12
23#:
AC-CODE,MUTE,RLSE,TRFR,REMDR)
Change to function
13
24#:
(PGANS,HS,TONE,MUTE,UNA,EXT,PSD,SSD)
Change to function
14
(TAKBK,RLSE,CONF,TRFR,DND,PKHLD)
-44-
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
3.0)
FF-4 Ring
Specifications
are made with regard to incoming
outside calls and incoming
intercom
call groups for
each extension.
In the case of outside lines it is set which incoming
calls each extension
is to receive.
The settings for daytime
and nighttime
can be
done separately.
There are the following
two group settings . for
incoming
intercom
calls.
A:Call hunting
group setting
Extensions are set in groups
incoming
calls.
The specifications
for answering
for group
processing
after
incoming
calls are also set
A maximum
of 8 groups each with 8 extensions
can be programmed.
8: Call coverage
Extension
answering
group
setting
groups are set for the substiture
of incoming
calls
Each group comprises 8 extensions,
2 of which
can be programmed
as secretary telephones
for
substitute
answering.
There can be a maximum
of 16 groups.
-45-
DBS
mode
D%S
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
FF-4 Ring mode
3- 4- 1 Day Time Incoming Calf Setting
mode
FF4-l#-(l -73)#-(l-
Daytime
table
32)#-(0
incoming
or l)#
outside
line call setting
It is set which incoming
outside line call tones are
to sound for each extension
during the day. While
it is possible to make calls from an extension
pon
not programmed
for incoming
calls, it is not
possible to use the auto answering
function
for
incoming
calls. Incoming
calls are answered
by
pressing the relevant line key or utilizing
the
function
for accessing the set outside line.
Extensions not stored in this table
incoming
outside line calls.
Setting step 1.
Select Extension
are not used for
The structure
port number:
Setting step 2.
Trunk port number:
Setting step 3.
Setting
Data to ring 1 or no ring 0:
(l-73)#
of the data
storing
in the table
is as
follows.
(l-32)#
Extension
(1 I O)#
1
Trunk
pan number
port number
1 #to
72#
l# to 32#
1
Ringing
for set incoming
daytime
(Yes: 1 or No: O)#
outside
line calls in
And
Number
1
Trunk
(for UNA Relay Terminal
port number
for set incoming
daytime
(Yes: 1 or No: O)#
Initial/y
line calls in
extension
Exxtension port number
set to ring forattendant
-46-
outside
Extension port number
step 2 that make to set the
data for ail otherports
automatically.
Note2.
73f
1% to 32#
1
Ringing
Note 1. When program
73in the setting
input)
by
1 and 2 is
telephone.
SECTION 400 (Version
issue 1 January 1990
3 - 4 - 2 Night
mode
FF4-2#-(
3.0)
FF-4 Ring
Time Incoming
1 - 73)#-(1-
32)#-(0
DBS
mode
Call Setting
or 1)#
Nighttime incoming outside line call
setting table
It is set which incoming
outside line call tones are
to sound for each extension during the night and
on holidays.
While it is possibleto
make calls from
an extension
port not programmed
for incoming
calls, it is not
possible to use the auto answering
function
for in
coming calls.
incoming
calls are answered by pressing the
relevant line key or utilizing
the function
accessing the set outside line.
Extensions not stored in thistable
incoming
outside line calls.
Setting
are not used for
step 1.
Select Extension
Setting step 2.
Trunk
for
The structure
pan number:
port number:
Setting step 3.
Setting Data to ring 1 or no ring 0:
(l-7318
of the data
storing
in the table
is as
foltows.
(l-32)#
Extension
(1 I O)#
Trunk
port number
1 #to
72#
1
port number
Ringing
daytime
1# to 32f
for set incoming
outside
(Yes: 1 or No: 0)#
line calls in
And
Number
Trunk
(for UNAReiay
port
number
Terminal
input)
73#
14 to 32#
1
Ringing
for set incoming
daytime
(Yes: 1 or No: O)#
Note 1. When program
73in the setting
data for ail other
automa tically.
Note2.
-47-
outside
line calls in
Extension port number
step 2 that make to set the
ports extension
Initially Extension port
set to ring forattendant
by
number
I and 2 is
:elephone.
$K
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
4
$oy
Issue 1 January 1990, # &
#$pJ(
4
- O)+
p” g
t)(\i, 4:’
DBS
FF-4 Ring mode
3 - 4 - 3 Hunting
When
Ce
group
setting
there is an incoming
mode
FF4-3#+-
call to a group
work unit within the company, if the extension
which has received it is busy, it is automatically
transferred
to another
extension in the group.
When
within
incoming
according
type
4+
[email protected],[email protected]+
there is an incoming
call to an extension
the hunting group which is busy, it is
r(’
extension in the table (hereafter
called the circular
mode), dr in the cati of an incoming
intercom call
on member 1 is transferred
in order and when the
last extension
is also busy and cannot receive the
transferred
call whether
to the extension making
absence transfer, the incoming
call is transferred
to the other extension set regardless
of the order
to busy tone is to be sent
the call and the transfer
process within the hunting
group thereby
terminated
(hereafter
called the terminate
mode).
This isthe same for incoming
outside line calls
set in this program.
If an extension receiving
a hunting
group transfer
is set for absence transfer, absence or OND, it is no
longer available and the call is transferred to the
within
mode
the transferred
call, whether the transfer process is
to be implemented
once more from the first
calls are
to the
There are 8 hunting groups and up to 8 extensions
wn be stored in each group.
However, when the extension called is set for
next extension
group
automatically
transferred
according
to the order
laid down in the hunting group table.
-This setting is for specifying,
if the last extension
stored in the table is also busy and cannot receive
With this setting extensions are stored for each
hunting group number for allowing
incoming
calls
to be automa tically transferred
between
them
when they are busy.
-. For the registered
extensions
transferred
within the group
order set
8)#-W-(1
Hunting
for a
except that the busy tone is not sent out in this
case.
The incoming
call tone is sent from the busy
the group.
extension
which
1 t-1 #-(0 - l)#:
-48-
has received
the call.
Call hunting
group 1 is
(0: Terminal,
1: Circular)
2+-l #-(0 - l)%: Incoming
call hunting
(0: Terminal,
group 2 is
1: Circular)
3#-I#-(0
- I)#:
incoming
call hunting
group 3 is
(0: Terminal,
1: Circular)
4#-l#-(O
- l)#:
Incoming
call hunting
group 4 is
(0: Terminal,
1: Circular)
5#-
#-(0 - l)#:
Incoming
call hunting
group 5 is
(0: Terminal,
1: Circular)
6#-
#-(0 - l)#:
Incoming
call hunting
(0: Terminal,
7#-
f-(0-
l)#:
Incoming
call hunting
group 7 is
(0: Terminal,
1: Circular)
8#- 1 B-(0 - I)#:
Incoming
call hunting
group 8 is
(0: Terminal,
1: Circular)
group 6 is
1: Circular)
/
..-
ii
‘\
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
3.0)
FF4-3#-(1-
8)#
Next
FF-4 Ring
8)#-2#-(l -
caI1hunting group
If all the extensions in one hunting
group cannot
receive an incoming
call, it can be automatically
transferred
to another
hunting
group. However,
a
hunting
group in which automatic
transfer is
.
actually operating
at the time cannot be set for
this. It has to be set after that operation
has
finished.
A hunting
group number for the transferee
is set
for each transferring
hunting
group. This setting
can be canceled by inputting
the [CONF] key.
l#-2#-(1-
8)# Transfer from group 1 to set group
:CONF (clear1
Group (1 to 8)#
2#-2#-(1
- 8)W Transfer from group 2 to set group
Group (1 to 8)#
:CONF (clear1
3#-2#-(1
- 8)# Transfer from group 3 to Set
Group (1 to 8)#
:CONF (clear1
4#-2#-(1
- 8)#
Transfer
Group
from
(1 to 8)#
grbUP
group 4to set group
:CONF (clear)
5#-2#-(l-
8)# Transfer from group 5 to set group
:CONF (clear)
Group (1 to 8)#
6#-ZP-(1
-8)#
Transfer from group 6 to set group
Group (1 to 8)#
:CONF (clear)
7#-2#-(1-
8)#
Transfer
Group
8#-2#-(1
- 8)#
(1 to 8)#
Transfer
Group
from
from
(1 to 8)#
group 7 to set group
:CONF (clear)
group
8 to set group
:CONF (clear)
-49-
D8S
mode
400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
SECTION
DBS
FF-4 Ring mode
FF4-3#-1#-(3-lO)#-(Extension
FF4-3#&-(3-lO)#-(Extension
numberIf
number)%
Hunting group 1 member table
Hunting group 4 member table
A maximum
When there
Same as group
of 8 extensions
is an incoming
can belong to group 1.
call to the group, it is
automatically
transferred
according
to the order
- 8 as stored.
E’xtension numbers already stored can be erased
1
by inputting
the [CONF] key.
A maximum
of 8 extensions
can be stored as
belonging
to hunting
group 1.
3#-(Extension
4#-(Extension
5#-(Extension
number)#:
number)#:
number)#:
Member
Member
Member
No.1
No.2
No.3
First
6#-(Extension
7#-(Extension
number)#:
number)#:
Member
Member
No.4
No.5
1
1
1
1
8#-(Extension
9#-(Extension
lO#-(Extension
number)%:
number)#:
number)#:
Member
Member
Member
No.6
No.7
No.8
1
1
End
3#-(Extension
4WExtension
S#-(Extension
C#-(Extension
?#-(Extension
8#-(Extension
9#-(Extension
lO#-(Extension
1
number)*
number)#:
number)#:
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
number)#:
Member
No.5
number)#:
number)#:
Member No.6
Member No.7
1
1
1
1
number)#:
Member
End
FF4-3#-5#-(3-lO)#-(Extension
O)#-(Extension
Same as group
1
number)#
1
Abbreviated
number)#
Hunting group 6 member table
number)#
Hunting group 2 member table
Same as group
No.8
1
Hunting group 5 member table
FFG3#-6#-(3-1O)P(Extension
FF4-3#-2%-(3-l
First
Member
Member
Member
Member
number)#:
Same as group
1
1
Abbreviated
3#-(Extension
4#-(Extension
number)#:
number)%:
Member
Member
No.1
No.2
First
5#-(Extension
6#-(Extension
Member
Member
Member
No.3
No.4
No.5
1
1
7+(Extension
number)%:
number)%:
number)#:
8#-(Extension
number)%:
Member
No.6
9#-(Extension
lO#-(Extension
number)#:
number)+:
Member
Member
No.7
No.8
1
1
1
FF4-3#-7&(3-lO)#-(Extension
number)++
Hunting group 7 member table
Same as group
1
1
End
Abbreviated
FF4-3#-8#-(3-lO)#-(Extension
number)+
Hunting group 8 member table
FF4-3#-3#-(3-lO)#-(Extension
number)#
Same as group
1
Hunting group 3 member table
Same as group
1
3#-(Extension
number)#:
Member
No.1
First
4#-(Extension
number)#:
Member
No.2
1
number)#:
number)++:
number)#:
Member
Member
Member
No.3
No.4
No.5
1
number)#:
number)#:
Member
Member
No.6
No.7
number)#:
Member
No.8
3#-(Extension
4#-(Extension
5#-(Extension
number)#:
number)#:
number)#:
Member
Member
Member
No.1
No.2
No.3
First
1
5#-(Extension
6B-(Extension
7#-(Extension
6#-(Extension
7#-(Extension
number)#:
number)#:
Member
Member
No.4
No.5
1
1
8W-(Extension
9#-(Extension
8#-(Extension
9#-(Extension
numb&#:
number)#:
Member
Member
No.6
No.7
lO#-(Extension
number)#:
Member
No.8
1
1
End
1
IO+(Extension
-so-
1
1
1
1
End
DBS
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January
FF-4 Ring
1990
3 - 4 - 4 Call Coverage Group setting mode
FF4-4#-5#-(1-
8)#-(extension
mode
number)#
Call coverage group 5 member table
FF4-4#-l#-(1
-8)#-(extension
Same as group
Abbreviated
number)#
fall coverage group 1 member table
Call coverage groups comprise those for
management
personnel
and the like separated
into work units for example, and secretaries
are
FF4-4#-6#-(l-
member of two call coverage groups.
The structure for the extension
numbers
table
of 8 extensions
belonging
to coverage
can be stored
group
number)#
Same as group 1
Abbreviated
FF4-4#-7+(1-
8)#-(extension
number)%
Call coverage group 7 member table
Same as group
1
Abbreviated
FF44+8#-(l-
8)#-(extension
number)%
Call coverage group 8 member table
in the
Same as group
Abbreviated
is as follows.
A maximum
8)#-(extensian
Call coverage group 6 member table
stored for each group. A group is composed of 6
member extensions
and 2 secretaries. A maximum
of 16 groups can be rtored in the system.
Secretaries and member ex tensions already
stored can be erased by inputting
the [CONFI key.
An extension stored in this table cannot become a
member of a hunting
group, neither can it be a
1
as
1.
FF4-4#-9#-(l-
1
8)#-(extension
number)#
Call coverage group 9 member table
l#-(Extension
2#-(Extension
number)#:Croup
number)#:Group
secretary
secretary
3#-(Extension
4#-(Extension
number)#:
number)%:
Member
Member
No.1
No.2
5#-(Extension
6#-(Extension
number)+:
number)#:
Member
Member
No.3
No.4
7#-(Extension
8#-(Extension
number)+:
number)%:
Member
Member
No.5
No.6
Same as group
Abbreviated
No.1
No.2
FF4-4#-lO#-(l -
1
8)#-(extension
number)P
Call coverage group 10 member table
Same as group 1
Abbreviated
FF4-4#-ll#-(lFF4-4#-15#-(1-
8)#-(extension
8)#-(extension
number)#
number)#
8)#-(extension
number)8
to
is abbreviated
FF4-4#-2#-(1-
8)#-(extension
number)#
Call coverage group t member table
Same as group
FF44#-16#-(1-
1
Cal! coverage group 16 member table
Abbreviated
FF4-4#-3#-(1-
Same as group
1
1
1 #-(Extension
2#-(Extension
3#-(Extension
number)#:Group
secretary
number)#:Group
secretary
number)#:
Member
No.1
- 8)#-(extension
4#-(Extension
S#-(Extension
number)#:
number)#:
Member
Member
No.2
No.3
6#-(Extension
7#-(Extension
number)#:
number)#:
Member
Member
No.4
No.5
B#-(Extension
number)#:
Member
No.6
8)#-(extension
number)8
Call coverage group 3 member table
Same as group
Abbreviated
FF4-4#-4#-(1
number)#
Call coverage group 4 member table
Same as group
1
Abbreviated
-57-
No. 1
No.2
t
T
T
T
T
-r
DBS
FF-5 iF key function
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
mode
3 - 5 FF key (Function
assiqnmenr)
&nlF.TbbRe
F15-(1 - 72)P(l-
24)#-
mode
fit&T.
(code)#
FF key function assignment for
extensions
The features
listed
the * and # keys on the dial pad are
used for entering data these symbols for feature
codes are tiered under FF key 11 r) and FF key
12 (#). When entering these symbols the display
will nor indicate that any data was entered.
NorerSince
on this page can be entered
by the associated code for each LED type key on
any extension. CO appearances
direct or pooled
must first be removed
by pressing the conf key
on a particular
key appearance
priorto
entering
new data. For programming
several phones with
the same or comparable
key layout see FF key
copy mode page.
Settina
Trunk port number
Extension number
(2 digits)
Extension number
Direct CO access
(3 digits)
Group call pick up
Absence message code
Call forward
code
code
UNA pick up
l-7)
mode
#51
#52
79#
‘\
(81-86,
9)#
\,
IFF 12 Key]-51 #
[EF 12 Key]-52#
[FF 12 Key]-53#
87
#8
‘I
speed dial
‘-$
IFF 12 Key&W
[FF 12 Key]-50#
#53
Answer key
Release key
Talk back key
78#
9#
(FF 12 Key)-(00-07)#
#(l-7)
#4
#SO
BGM on/off
Account code
Intercom key
I personal
72
73
74
9
IDT stop/reset
System
method
(1-32)#
[PROGI-.( lo-69)#
.ExL (100-699)
Trunk (l-32)
70
71
78
79
Group(81-86,9)
Direct pick up
Pooled trunk access
LCR call
Headset /handset
Night mood set
Settino
75
77
Meet me answer
Page call (Zone
Alarm setting
contents
Trunk (l-32)
Ext. (10-69)
[FF 12 Key]-7#
[FF 12 Key]-8#
‘2
l3
[FF 11 Key]-l#
[FF 11 Key]-2#
[iF 11 Key]-3#
(AUTO)-(00-99)
AUTO-(00-99)
-52-
#
..,
‘.
-._
-----.--_ -_-
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
FF5-(73 - 76)#-(1
3.0)
FF-5 FF key function
- 72)#-
DES
mode
(code)#
FFkey function assignmentfor DSS
consoles
The features
listed on this page can be entered
Since the * and #keys on the dial pad are \
used for entering data these symbols for
feature codes are stored under FF key 1 I
( l ) and FF key 72 ( % ). When entering
these symbols the display will not
,
indicate that any data was entered.
by the associated code for each LED type per
each console. CO appearances
direct or pooled
must first be removed
on a particular
by pressing
key appearance
the conf key
prior to entering
\7---rp
new data.
Settino
contents
Trunk port number
Extension number (2 digits)
Trunk (l-32)
Ext. (10-69)
Extension number
Direct CO access
EXL (100-699)
Trunk (l-32)
Group
(3 digits)
call pick up
Absence message code
Call forward
code
DND set code
Station lockout
Park hold
code
Meet me answer
UNA pick up
Direct pick up
Alarm
Headset ! handset
Night mood set
mode
lo-69)#
l OO-699)#
72#
73#
75
74#
75%
77
78
77#
78#
Cr
79#
(81-86,
9)#
9%
(FF 12 Key)-(00-07)#
w-7)
#4
#SO
!DT stop/reset
method
(8801-8832)#
708
71%
72
73
74
9
setting
(l-32)#
[PROG]-.(
[PROGI-.(
70
71
79
Group(Sl-86.9)
Pooled trunk access
LCR call
Page call (Zone l-7)
Settino
[FF 12 Key]-4#
[FF 12 Key]-50#
[FF 12 Key]-5?#
#Sl
#52
[FF 12 Key]-52#
BGM on/off
Account code
x53
87
[FF 12 Key]-53#
[FF 12 Key]-7#
Intercom key
Answer key
C8
‘1
[FF 12 Key]-8#
[FF 11 Key]-1#
Release key
Talk back key
System /personal
‘2
‘3
[FF 11 Key]-2#
[FF 17 Key]-3#
(AUTO)-(00-99)
AUTO-(00-99)
speed dial
-53-
#
DBS
FF-6 Name and Message
3 - 6 Name (Name
mode
storing
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
mode
and messaqe
storinql
Each extension, SSDand PSDname, and absence
message is stored.
For storing the keys assigned by alphabetical
letters and symbols of the DSSf72 (DSS
console}(W3-43320) connected to the attendant’s
telephone are used.
Character
DATA
BS:Step
Panasonic
M-43225
Figure
Fig 3-l
DATA(0
V&43225
-54-
to 9)
and VW3320
VB-43320
back space
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 Jayp
1990
FF6l#-(l-
DES
mode
3.0)
FF-6 Name and Message
72)#-(Name)#
FF63#-(l -
72)#-(90
storing
- 99)#-(Name)#
Assigning names extensions
Assigning names to PSDcodes
Names are stored for each of the extension
ports
from 1 to 72. By having the names stored for each
of the extensions,
it is possible forthe two parties
to confirm
each others name while making an
intercom
tail.
This is particularly
useful when receiving a call
Names are nod
for PSD (Personal speed dial)
codes 90 - 99 of each of the extension
ports from
to 72.
This function
is the same as Assigning
names to
SSD code (FF6-2#-(00
- 89)#).
The names consist of a maximum
of 16 letters.
from another
extension
in that you can see the
name of the callers extension
at a glance.
In addition,
the names stored are normally
shown
FF6-3#-NN(l -72)#-SS(90NN#:
on the LCD of a registered
extension.
A name consists of a maximum
of 10 letters.
FF6-1 #-NN( 1 - 72)#-(Name)#
Extension port number
NN#:
to store (the
automatically
[CONF]#:
Nick#:
it is desired
extension
number
displayed).
For clear previous
When it is desired
data
to store
99)#-(Name)#
SSP:
Extension port number it is
desired to store
PSD code it is desired to
[CONF]#:
store
For clear previous
Panasonic
Service
#: (When
is
it is desired
Panasonic
example)
Service
data
to store
for
Nick for
example.
FFG-2#-(00
- 89)#-
(Name)#
FF6-4#-(5
- 9)#- (Message)#
Assigning names to SSD code
Assigning absencemessage
Names are stored
An absence message can be conveyed
who calls while you are out
for each of the SSD (System
speed dial) codes from 00 to 89. By having names
stored for each of the SSD codes, the name can be
confirmed
when dialing using SSD.
This is particularly
telephone
having
useful for SSD numbers
a large display because
A message
stored names are clearly arranged
alphabetically
and the name of the party you intend to call can
be seen at a glance.
In addition,
the stored
LCD during
FF6-2#-NN(O0
NN#:
a call made
- 89)#-
is indicated
using the
(Name)#
Special
desired
[CONF]#:
Panasonic
Co.. f:
FF6-4#-(5
consists of a maximum
stored
[CONF]#:
At Panasonic
to store
Industrial
#:
For clear previous data
(When it is desired to store,
‘I leftto
example)
speed dial code it is
For clear previous data
(When it is desired to store
Panasonic
Customized
Absence
Message to be stored
on the
SSD.
for
example)
-55-
of 15 letters.
- 9)#- (Message)#
(S-9)8:
name
to a party
With this setting the contents are stored in
message codes 5 - 9. Message codes 0 - 4 have been
stored beforehand
and cannot be changed.
on a
the
1
Panasonic’
for
DES
FF-7 TR6 mode
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
3 - 7 TRS (Toll restrictian
svstem)
mode
FR-l#-
ifis specified
determined
dialed from
each telephone.
In that restrictions
can be set for daytime and
nighttime
separately,
it is also possible to
expensive
telephone
Toll restriction implemented
the structure
which
charges.
determining
calls
method
of the following
restrictions
depending
extensions
(X = 0-9.P
g& opx-xXxXx
of a simple
TRS
= 2-9)
Restrict (Not determined
table)
Allow (Not determined
AX-xXxXx
table)
Determined
table
l#:
~-xXxXx
Note
1: For the system installation
system.
necessary
+ 1 Area.
FF7- 1B-2%-(0
Dialing
is
on whether
the first digit
set as types 3 - 6 is 1 or 0.
= 0orl.N
here is done by
determining
whether
or not the call is
allowed depending
on the number
dialed by
means of the code table in the main memory
(toll numberarea numbertelephone
number).
Below is shown
or l)#
Setting restriction
for Long distance,
for a telephone.
There are 7 types of setting for each outside
line connected to the system in the case of
This is to set toll restriction
control
l#-(0
to specify
by office
by
by
code
area it is
either
+ 7 Area or Non
or l)#
restriction
It is specified
during
whetherthe
incoming
dial signal
call
can be sent
out to outside lines which has received an
incoming
calls from extensions set as types 3 - 6.
The dial signal is sent out while the call is in
progress after it has been answered,
and at such
times the call sent is not restricted
according
to
the dialing contents [set functions].
The call sent is subjectto
restriction
irrespective
the setting when the FLASH key is pressed down
after the telephone
-56-
of
conversation.
0%:
Not possible to dial during
incoming
call answered
conversation
18:
Possible to dial durinu conversation
incomins
call answered.
after
after
DBS
FF-7 TRS mode
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
issue 1 January 1990
’ 45
FF7-I#-3#-(BarF)#
FWl#-6#-(0
or l)#
Restriction for maximum number of digits
$$J dial restriction
dialed when making call
It is 311 dial restriction, to types 2 to 6.
The maximum number of digits which can be sent
out forthe dialing signal from extensions set as
types 3 - 6 is specified.
The setting is within the range of 15 - 29 digits,
and it is also possible to specify that the number of
digits not be restricted.
O#: 411 dial calls possible
l#: No 411 dial calls oossibie
FF7-l#-7#-(0 or l)#
511 dial restriction
It is 3 11 dial restriction. to types 2 to 6.
ICONFI#: Number of dioits not restricted
1#: Dialing not sent out after 1Sth digit dialed
2#: Dialing not sent out after 16th digit dialed
3P: Dialing not sent out after 17th digit dialed
4#: Dialing not sent out after 18th digit dialed
Sf: Dialing not sent out after 19th digit dialed
68: Dialing not sent out after 20th digit dialed
7#: Dialing not sent out after 2lst digit dialed
8#: Dialing not sent out after 22nd digit dialed
9#: Dialing not sent out after 23rd digit dialed
10f: Dialing not sent out after 24th digit dialed
1 l#: Dialing not sent out after 25th digit dialed
12#: Dialing not sent out after 26th digit dialed
13#: Dialing not sent out after 27th digit dialed
14#: Dialing not sent out after 28th digit dialed
15#: Dialing not sent out after 29th digit dialed
FF7-1#4#-(0
O#:_sll dial calls possible
l#: No 511 dial calls oossible
FW-l#-8#40
It is 311 dial restriction, to types 2 to 6.
0#: 611 dial calls possible
l#: No 611 dial calls oossible
FF7-1SC-9#-(0or I)#
711 dial restriction
It is 311 dial restriction, to types 2 to 6.
O#mdial
calls possible
1R: No 711 dial calls Dossible
or l)#
211 dial restriction
FF7-l#-lO#-(O or l)#
It is specified whether the 211 dial signal can be
sent out from extensions set as types 2 - 6.
/
nc
l#:
811 dial restriction
It is 311 dial restriction, to types 2 to 6.
/
08: 811 dial calls possible
l#: No 811 dial calls possible
No 211 dial calls oossible
FF7-l#-5#-(0
or l)#
.
$JJAal
restriction
or l)#
’ ,. ,.f
,I r
Fn-l#-1
l#-(O or I)#
911
- dial restriction
317 dial restriction
It is 31 l.dial restriction, to types 2 to 6.
It is31 1 dial restriction, to types 2 to 6.
O#calls possible
A----311 dial.-___
-----z1%: No 311 dial calls oossible
0#: 911 dial
iL- calls possible
I#: No 911 dial calls oossible
-57-
DBS
FF-7 TRS mode
FF7-l#
12#-(0
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
or l)#
FF7-1% l!i#-(O
Setting 7 digit dial’restriction from Typ; 2
extension
It is specified whether to have a 7 digit dial
restriction
for the signal from an extension
Type 2.
0%:
Signal from Type 2 not subjectto
1R:
restriction
Sicmal from Tvue 2 subject
restriction
FF7-l#
13#-(Oar
It is specified
restriction
Type 3.
dial
dial
from
signal
from
l#:
restriction
Sionai from
dial
1%:
restriction
Sianai from Tvoe 5 subiect
restriction
to 7 digit
to 7 diqit
dial
dial
or l)#
It is specified
TYDe 3 subiectto
set as
7 digit
restriction
Type 6.
dial
0%:
7 dkyit dial
l#:
restriction
whetherto
for the signal
from Type 6
dial restriction
fromType
4
whether
to have a 7 digit
for the signal
from
dial
an extension
set as
Type 4.
0#:
Signal from
Type 4 not subjectto
1 R:
restriction
Siqnal from
Tvoe 4 subiect
7 digit
to 7 diuit
dial
dial
restriction
-58-
have a 7 digit
from
dial
an extension
set as
Signal from Type 6 not subject to 7 digit dial
restriction
Sianal from Tvoe 6 subject to 7 diqit dial
rertriction
extension
restriction
Signal from Type 5 not subject
Setting 7 digit dial restriction
Type 3
an extension
Signal from Type 3 not subjectto
FF7-1# 14#-(0 or l)#
Setting
7 digit
set as
extension
to have a 7 digit
0#:
It is specified
O#:
FF7-1% 16#-(0
dial restriction
whether
forthe
extension
Type 5.
1)s
Setting 7 digit
extension
from Type 5
’ It is specified whether to have a 7 digit dial
restriction
for the signal from an extension
set as
7 digit
to 7 diait
or l)#
Setting 7 digit dial restriction
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 Janu/ary 1990
FF7-2#-(3
3.0)
DBS
FF-7 TRS mode
p$
[email protected]
- 6)#-(000 - 999)+-O
Mea
code table
or 1#
FF7-3k(3
storing
The area code table for determining
restrictions
on calls from extensions
the
of types 3 - 6
conforms
with
that stored,
the outside
call
below.
or l)#
storing
When the call is determined
as such, as the
outside line is released the intercom busy tone
is subject to restriction.
When the call is determined
as such, as the o&ide
line is released the intercom
busy tone is sent to
the extension
which has madethe
call and
“Restricted”
The dialing
code table
- 999)#-(0
code table
The office code table for determining
the
retictions
on calls from extensions of types 3 - 6
is stored. The office code 000 - 999) for each of
types 3 - 6 is stored, so that when the office code
number dialed conforms with that stored, the
outside call is subject to restriction.
is stored.
The area code (000 - 999) for each of types 3 - 6 is
registered,
so that when the area code number
dialed
- 6)#-(000
Office
sent to the extension
“Restricted’
appears
appears on the LCD.
numbers determined
from the area
are the 3 underlined
digits as indicated
The dialing
underlined
is
which has made the call and
on the LCD.
numbers determined
are the 3
digits as indicated
below. (X = 0 - 9)
(X = 0 - 9,
1-xxx-XxXx
1 + Area code location:
Non 1 + Area code location:
1 + Area code location:
-xxx-XxXx
l-~-XXX
l-xxx-xxx-XxXx
I-0-XXX-xxx-XXX-XXXX
Non 1 + Area code location:
l-xxx-xxx-XxXx
Officecodes
not stored
in this table
to call restriction.
The structure for data storing
I-o-xxx-~-xxx-xXxX
are not subject
in the table
is as
followed.
Area codes not stored
in this table
to toll restriction.
The struCture for data storing
are not subject
TRStype
in the table
is as
Office
foilowed.
TRS type Number3#
DENY
DENY
TRS type Number S# ALLOW
Area code DATA:
(OOO-999)#-(Deny:
1 or Allow:O)#
TRS type Number 5# ALLOW
‘0’
Office code DATA:
(OOO-999)#-(Deny:
1 or Allow:O)#
1 or Allow:O)#
TRS type Number
‘0’
Office
6#
ALLOW
code DATA:
(OOO-999)#-(Deny:
‘0’
1 or Allow:O)#
1 or Allow:O)#
TRS type Number 68 ALLOW
Area code DATA:
(OOO-999)#-(Deny:
Note : For the system instalia tion area it is
necessary to specify either T + Area
‘0’
1 or Aliow:O)#
Note : For the system installation
necessary to specify
Non I + Area.
code DATA:
(OOO-999)#-(Deny:
“1’
1 or Allow:O)#
-1’
(OOO-999)#-(Deny:
DENY
TRS type Number 4# ALLOW
‘0’
Office code DATA:
(OOO-999)#-(Deny:
1 or Allow:O)#
‘I’
Area code DATA:
(OOO-999)#-(Deny:
TRS type Number 4#
Area code DATA:
Number3#
either
Non I + Area.
area it is
I + Area or
-59-
or
>
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
DBS
FF-7 TRS mode
FF7-4#-(l-
4)#- ((000 - 999) or [CONFl)#
Special
area code table
storing
The special area code table for determining
the
restrictions
on calls from extensions of types 3 - 6
is stored.
The special area code (000 - 999) for each of types
3 - 6 is stored, so that when the area code number
dialed
con forms
with
that stored,
it is confirmed
by the special office code table corresponding
to
the respective special area code table and subject
to restriction
if the ofice code conforms.
When the call is determined
as such, asthe outside
line is released the intercom
busy tone is sent to
the extension
which has made the call and
“Restricted”
ratherthat
appears on the LCD. That is to say,
determining
the area code or office
code separately,
a telephone
number headed by 6
digits combining
the special area code and special
office code is determined.
In this table are stored
4 special area code (000 - 999) tables,
area codes already stored are deleted
[CONF].
The dialing
numbers
underlined
digits
determined
as indicated
and special
by inputting
are the 3
below.
(X = 0 - 9)
Special area code Number 1 #
Special area code DATA:
1 + Area code location:
l-~-XXX-XXXX
I-0-XXX-z-XXX-XXXX
(OOO-999)#Qx&CONF]
Speciai area code Number 2#
Special area code DATA:
Non 1 + Area code location:
l-XXX-~XXXX
l-&xxx-~-xxx-xXxX
Special
area codes not stored
to call restriction.
The structure for data storing
in this is not subject
(000-999)#/w[CONFj
Special area code Number 3#
Special area code DATA:
in the table
Special
is as
(OOO-999)#/w[CONF]
area code Number
Special area code DATA:
(OOO-999)#/m:[CONF]
followed.
-6O-
4#
SECTION 400 (Version
FF7-5#-(I
- 4)#-$
3.0)
DBS
FF-7 TRS mode
or l)#
Specialoffice code table storing
The special
restrictions
stored.
office code table for determining
the
on calls from extensions
of types 3 - 6 is
The special area code (000 - 999) for each of types
3 - 6 is stored, so that when the area code number
dialed conforms with that stored, it is confirmed
by the special
the respective
office code table corresponding
to
special area code table and subject
to restriction
if the office code conforms.
When the call is determined
as such, as the outside
line is released the intercom
busy tone is sent to
the extension
which has made the call and
“Restricted”
appears on the LCD.
That is to say, rather that determining
code or office
code separately,
the area
a telephone
number headed by 6 digits combining
the special
area code and special office code is determined.
In this table are stored 4 special area code (000 999) tables,
are deleted
and special
by inputting
The dialing
numbers
underlined
digits
ofice codes already
[CONF].
determined
as indicated
arethe
below.
stored
3
(X = 0 - 9)
1 + Area code location:
Special
l-xxx-m-XxXx
I-o-xxx-xxx-~-xXxX
Non 1 + Area code location:
subject
storing
I-xxx-~-XxXx
l-o-xxx-xxx-~-xXxX
office
codes not stored in this table are not
The structure for data
to call restriction.
in the table is as followed.
Special office code Number l#
Special area code DATA : DENY
(OOO-999)#-(Deny:
Special office code Number 29
Special area code DATA: DENY
(OOO-999)#-(Deny:1
Special
office
-61-
‘1’
“0’
1 or Allow:O)$
code Number
Special area code
(OOO-999)#-(Deny:
l
or Allow:O)#
Special office code Number 3#
Special area code DATA:ALLOW
(OOO-999)#-(Deny:
‘1
1 or Allow:O)#
4#
DATA: ALLOW
1 orAllow:O)#
“0’
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
DBS
FF-7 TR5 mode
FF7-6#-(1
- 50)#-(0000000
- 9999999)#
7digit call restriction table storing
Calls sent from extensions set as types 2 - 6 are
determined
by the area/office
codes or special
area/office
codes and it is confirmed
that they
have been dialed.
Then they are verified against the 7 digit dial
numbers already stored, and if they conform
[to
one of these numbers] the sending of the dial
signal is restricted.
A maximum of 50 7 digit dial numbers can be
stored, and special area codes already stored are
deleted
by inputting
jCONF]#:
(0000000
Note:
- 999999918:
-*
and “f”
[CONF].
Reset programed
data
7 digit dial numbers
cannot
be input.
-62-
d’
TYPE
SETTING
----- -
CALLING ACCESS
0
ICM only, NO outgoing
that extension
calls
1
ICM only,, NO outgoing
calls,!
2
7 Digit
4
Deny
can answer calls
Allow
SPECIAL AREA
CODES
UP TO FOUR
l-4
ringing
ringing
numbers and l-800 numbers ONLY allowed
AREA
CODES
CODES
UP To 1000 UP TO 1000
Deny
Deny
3
,, can only answer calls
anywhere
- /
SPECIAL OFFICE
CODES
UP TO lOUO/ONE SPA
Deny
/d?
l-4
tc
--
0
Deny
,.
5
Allow
Allow
l-4
Deny
6
Allow
Allow
l-4'
Deny
7
DEFAULT= FULL ACCESS,! COMPLETELYUNRESTRICTED
dG
6
. -
Values 0,1,2
I I
Values 3,4,'5,6
I I !
.are controlled
are flexible,,
Types 3,,4,,5,6,!
above setting
I
(Deny/Allow)
restrictions
programmable restrictions
are-default
,
in the system and are changeable
a
-.
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
FF7-7#-(1
3.0)
DBS
FF-7 TRS mode
yts
--#I.
@A- 72)#-(l32)#-(0 - 7)#
Day time TRS type setting
The toil restriction
type (0 - 7) for the daytime
band is set for each outside line port number in
the case of each
Of:
extension.
Type 0: No outside calls can be made. Apart.
from answering
calls coming in on your
outside
line, or putting
another
telephone
38:
on
the lamp flashes. after the telephone
conversation
is finished, the extension is in
the call status with the specified
restrictions.Beiow
are shown the relevant
hold and transferring,
it is also not possible to
get an outside line. After a conversation
on
an outside line has finished,
and the busy tone sounds.
I#:
2#:
the lamp flashes
B.
C
Type 1: No outside calls can be made. Apart
from answering
calls coming in on an outside
line, or putting anothertelephone
on hold
and transferring,
it is also not possible to get
an outside line. After a conversation
on an
outside line has finished, the lamp flashes
E.
F.
and the busy tone
H.
c
sounds.
Type 2: Apart from talk-free
calls cannot
be made. Below
dialing, trunk
are shown the
(Dial: Auto (NN - 89))
F. 7 digit restriction
(Stored
(Dial:
Restriction
on number
(15-30)
digits)
Auto
(NN - 89))
area or office code)
special area and
of dialing
digits
(Max.
58:
Type 5: Restrictions
are same as Type 4.
6%: Type 6: Restrictions
are same as Type 4.
0)
number)
override
3 digit restriction
(stored
6 digit restriction
(stored
special office codes)
Type 4: Restrictions
are made based on the
specifications
for each type (3 - 6).
7R:
phone
1-l)
SSD restriction
4#:
B. Timing between dialing digits (Max. 6 set)
C Specific 3 digit dialing restriction
(Dial:
details about the call restrictions.
Timing between dialing digits (Max. 6 sec.)
Specific 3 digit dialing restriction
(Dial: (2 - 9)-
*NN : System setting
relevant details about the call restrictions.
A Restriction
on number of dialing digits
(Max. 7 digits)
(Dial: (2 - 9)-1-t)
D. Operator
call restriction
E SSD restriction
override
Type 3: Restrictions
are made based on the
specifications
set for each type (3 - 6). When
Tvpe 7: Not applicable
,yrW
//
ix
to any of the
.-_.
FF7-7#-(l-
72)#-33#-(0
-..
- 7)#
--.
Day time all TRS setting
When
\ \. ,,
-63-
data(O-7)#
is set for address
(1-72)#-33,
same setting
extension
done automatically
No. FF7-7#-
of all CO for desired
‘!
D&i
FF-7 TRS mode
FF7-8#-xl-
72)#-(1-
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
32)#-(0
- 7)#
Night time IRS type setting
The toll restriction type (0 - 7) for the nighttime
band is set for each out- side line port number
the case of each extension.
O#:
3#:
Type 3: Restrictions are made based on the
specifications
set for each type (3 - 6).
in
When the lamp flashes after the telephone
conversation
is finished, the extension
is in
the call status with the specified
restrictions.
Below are shown the relevant details about
Type 0: No outside calls can be made. Apart
from answering
calls coming in on an outside
line, or putting
and transferring,
another telephone
on hold
it is also not possible to get
the
8.
C
an outside line. After a conversation
on an
outside line has finished, the lamp flashes
l#:
and the busy tone
sounds.
Type 1: No outside
calls can be made.
from answering
line, or putting
SSD restriction
override
(Dial: Auto (NM - 89)
F.
C.
3 digit restriction
(stored area or office
6 digit restriction
H.
(stored special area and special office
codes)
Restriction
on number of dialing digits
and transferring,
it is also not possible to get
an outside line. After a conversation
on an
outside line has finished, the lamp flashes
and the busy tone
2#:
sounds.
code)
(Max. (1 S - 30) digits)
l NN:System
Type 2: Apart from talk - free dialing, trunk
calls cannot be made. Below are shown the
relevant details aboutthe
A
Restriction on number
(Max. 6 digits)
6 sec.)
E.
Apart
calls coming in on an outside
anothertelephone
on hold
call restrictions.
Timing between dialing digits(Max.
Specific 3 digit dialing restriction
(Dial:(2-9)-1-l)
call restrictions.
of dialing digits
8.
C
Timing between dialing digits (Max. 6 set)
Specific 3 digit dialing restriction
(Dial: (2 -9)-l-l)
0.
E.
Operator
call restriction
SSD restriction
override
F.
(Dial: Auto (NN - 89))
7 digit restriction
(stored
(Dial:
setting
4#:
Type 4: Restrictions
are made based on the
specifications
for each type (3 - 6).
5#:
Type 5: Restrictions
are same as Type 4.
6#:
Type 6: Restrictions
are same as Type 4.
7R:
Tvoe 7: Not aoolicable
0)
to any of the
restrictions.
phone
number)
Note
: Change to the nighttime
done by &he attendant
mode is either
by a key operation
or automa tically by the system..
In this case it works from the time specified
by the system.
FF7-8#-ql -
72)#-33#-(0
Night
When
-64-
- 7)#
time all TRS setting
data(O-7)#
is set for address
(l-72)+33,
same setting
extension
done automatically.
No. FF7-7#-
of all CO for desired
SECTION 400 (Version
issue 1 January 1990
FF7-9#-xl-
4)#-(0
3.0)
DES
FF-7 TRS mode
or l)#
FF7-9#-#(9
Area CodeType Blocksetting mode
The area codes (000 - 999) can be globally
replaced
so that they are the same TRS mode for each type
(3 - 6).
M = 9:Changing
Area & office
(000 - OOO)# - (Restrict : 1 or Allow : 0)#
M = 2:Changing
area code mode of Type 4
- 8)#-(0
of Type 3
(000 - OOO)# -(Restrict
: 1 or Allow : O)#
M = 11 :Changing
area & office code mode of Type S
.(OOO - 000)f - (Restrict : 1 or Allow : O)#
M = 4:Changing
area code mode of Type 6
Fn-S#$$S
area & office code mode
code DATA :
(000 - OOO)# - (Rest&
: 1 or Allow : 0)#
M = 10:Changing
area & office code mode of Type 4
Area & office code DATA :
Area code DATA :
(000 - OOO)# -(Restrict
: 1 or Allow : 0)#
lVl= 3:Changing
area code mode of Type S
Area code DATA :
: 1 or Allow
or l)#
The area/office
codes (000 - 999) can be globally
replaced so that they are the same TRS mode for
each type (3 - 6).
-
M = 1 :Changing
area code mode of Type 3
Area code DATA :
Area code DATA :
(000 - OOO)# - (Restrict
- lt)#-(O
Area & Office CodeType Blo’& setting
mode
Area & office code DATA :
(000- OOO)# - (Restrict : 1 or Allow : O)#
M = 12:Changing
area & office code mode of Type 6
: O)#
Area & office code DATA :
(000 - OOb)# - (Restrict : 1 or Allow
: O)#
or l)#
Office CodeType Blocksetting mode
FF7-9#-$03
The office codes (000 - 999) can be globally
replaced so that they are the same TRS mode
SpecialArea Codefor Office CodeType
Blocksetting mode
for
each type (3 - 6).
M = S:Changing
Office
- 16)#-(0
The special
office
code mode
or 1)#
area codes (000 - 999) can be globally
_replaced so that they are the same TRS mode
each type (3 - 6).
of Type 3
for
code DATA :
(000 - OOO)# - (Restrict : 1 or Allow : O)#
M = 6:Changing
office code mode of Type 4
M = 13:Changing
special area code mode of Type 3
Special area code DATA :
(000 - OOO)# - (Restrict : 1 or Allow : O)#
Office code DATA :
(000 - OOO)# -(Restrict
: 1 or Allow : 0)#
M = 7:Changing
office code mode of Type 5
Office code DATA :
(000 - 000)f - (Restrict
M = 8:Changing
office
: 1 or Allow
code mode
Office code DATA :
(000 - OOO)# - (Restrict
M = 14:Changing
special area code mode
Special area code DATA :
(000 - 000)s
M = 15:Changing
: 0)#
of Type 6
: 1 or Allow
Spkial
of Type 4
-(Restrict
: 1 or Allow : O)#
special area code mode of Type S
area code DATA
:
(000 - OOO)# - (Restrict : 1 or Allow : O)#
M = 16:Changing
special area code mode of Type 6
: 0)#
Special area code DATA :
(000 - OOO)# - (Restrict : 1 or Allow
-65
: O)#
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
DES
FF-8 LCR mode
3 - 8 LCR (Least
cost routinq) mode
Outside calls can be made at less cost by using MU,
SPRINT, etc. than through
the ordinary
ATfines.
The LCR (Least Cost Routing) function
has been
devised to enable the automatic
use of the
cheapest
line when
dialing
out
A table is preparedaccording
to the programming
and the line is automa tically selected by the system
searching this table when calls are made.
With this function
telephone
charges can be
substantially
reduced, particularly
in that there
tendency to make oukide
calls without
being
conscious of the fact.
is a
The procedure
for setting the LCR mode involves
firstly checking the cheapest trunk number when
calling at each time and in each outside line group
based on the telephone
numbers
of the parties
be called. Then the order of priority
fram the
point telephone
call costs is determined
and
stored in the table.
The following
is a description
simple LCR system.
of a stnrcture
to
for a
-66-
DBS
FF-B LCR mod
FFB-3#-(l-
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
,,d
\ -Y
&
4)#- (000 - 999 or[CONFl)#
Specialarea code table storing
In order to find the cheapest outside line group to
be used from among the numbers stating
with 6
digits when making an LCR call, the call is made in
accordance
with the special office code for each
special area code specified by the time priority
table.
Rather than the area code or office code being
determined
individually,
a telephone
number of 6
digits combining
the special area code and special
office code is stored.
In this table are stored 4 special area code (000 999) tables, and special area codes already stored
are deleted
by inputting
[CONF].
The dial decided on forthe
NPX as shown below.
(N = 2-9,P
= 0-1.X
1 + Area code :
NON 1 + Areacode:
Special
-. -.
special
area code for
Special Area code Table Number
Special area code DATA:
= O-9)
(000-999)#
I-w-Xxx-xXxX
m-XXX-XXXX
area codes not stored
Special
Special
in thistable
be used for LCR calls. The structure
storing in the tabie is as follows.
Area code Table
forthe
I#
or Delete:(CONF]
Number
2#
area code DATA:
(OOO-999)# or Delete:[CONFI
cannot
data
Special Area code Table Number 38
Special area code DATA:
(OOO-999)# or Delete:[CONFj
Special
Area code Table
Special
NOTE 1:
NOTEZ:
-68-
Number
4#
area code DATA:
(OOO-999)# or Delete:[CONFl
For the system installation
area it is
necessary to set either
1 + Area or
Non 1 + Area.
LCR calls cannot
lines connected
be made from outside
to a PBX.
SECnON 400 (Version
issue 1 January 1990
DBS
FF-8 LCR mode
3.0)
FF&4#-( 1 - 4)#- (1 - 15)#-(000 - 999)#-(0 or l)#
Special
office code table storing
I (Time prioritytable
In order to find the cheapest outside line group to
be used from among the numbers starting with 6
digits when making an LCR call, the call is made in
accordance
with the special office code for each
special area code specified by the time priority
table.
Rather than the area code or ofice
code
Time priority
I (Special
corresponding
to the 4 special
being
(N=2-9,P=O-1,X=0-9)
1 + Area code :
NON 1 + Areacode:
office
in thistable
code is
NOTE 2:
cannot
Special
1#
Number
number
l-15)
15#
For the system installation
necessary to set either
Non 1 + Area.
for the data
code Table
number
Special office code DATA:
(OOO-999)#-(Store:
1 or Delete:O)#
NOTE 7:
be used for LCR calls. The structure
storing in the table is as follows.
Office
l-4)
area
1 - NPX-XXX-XXXX
NPX-XXX-XXXX
codes not stored
code number
I (Time prioritytable
Time prioritytable
The dial decided on forthe
special office
derived
from XXX as shown below.
15#
Special office code DATA:
(000-999)#-(Store:l
or Delete:O)#
codes.
Special
Office
number
l-15)
Special Office code Table Number 4#
Time prioritytable
number l#
determined
individually,
a telephone
number of 6
digits combining
the special area code and special
office code is stored.
In this table are stored 4 special office code (000 999) tables
table
number
LCR calls cannot
lines connected
Time prioritytable
number
1#
Special office code DATA:
(OOO-999)#-(Store:1
or Delete:O)#
-69-
area it is
1 + Area or
be made from
to a PBX.
outside
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
FF&S#-(l
Time
“ls)#-(l-48)#-(i
: 8)#
Priority Table setting
The time priority table is combined
with the trunk
group table and is devised for making calls from
the cheapesttrunk
group within the designated
time band.
There are 15 time priority tables and for each of
them 8trunk groups can be set for the 6 time
bands.
In addition,
as the order or priority
can be
fixed within the programmed
trunk groups, it is
possible to divide them up even more precisely.
Time
The data are set according
to the programming
of
Priority
Table
number
1#
. l -8%:
(7:0OAM-8:00AM)
1 #_z2#~3#-~-S#-6+7#-8#__
9 - 16#: (8:00AM-S:OOPM)
9#%
IO+ t ll#
129.
the LCR trunk group numbers, and for
.
cancellations
the CONF key is input as data.
17 - 2z
13#-14#-lSC_lW_
(S:;PMGOPM)
1 ?#Ll8#%
9#-20#-21#-22#-23#-24#25 - 32#:
(8:00PM-12:OOPM)
25#-26#-2?#-28#-29#-308-3
1#-32#-
33 - 4oR: (0:00AM-7:OOAM)
33#_34#-35#_36#3?#_38#39#40#41- 48#:
Weekend)
41#-42#-43#-~#-45#-46#_4?#_48i
High t PRIORITY + LOW
(Time
Time
Priority
Priority
Table
Table
number
number
l-15)
158
1 - 8f:
(7:OOAM-8:oOAM)
1#-2#-3#__#-S#-6#-?#-8#9 - 16#: (8:OOAIWS:OOPM)
9#17 - 24#:
10#~11#~12#~13#~14#~15#~~6f~
(5:00PM-8:00PM)
1?#~18#~19#~20#~21~~22#~23#~24#~
25 - 32%:
(8:00PM-12:OOPM)
2S#1t_26#_2?#-28#-29#-30#_31
33 - 408:
(O:OOAM-7:OOAM)
33#34#3S#-36#-37#_38#-39#40#41- 08#:
(Weekend)
41 #42#-43#-44#B4S#46+-4?f-48#High c PRIORITY + LOW
-7o-
#-mm
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
---de?
FFS-6&l
%&-(I
- 8)#- (l -32)#
FF8-7#-(l-
8)#-(Max.
10 ‘digit
numbers)#
Trunk Grotip Table Setting
Dial delete table storing
When making an LCR call the line within the
cheapest trunk group table at the time of catling is
used.
There are a total of 8 trunk group tables in each of
The numbers it is desired to delete from the heads
of the numbers input into each LCRtrunk group
are stored. Up to a maximum
of 16 digits can be
deleted.
which 8 lines can be set
The order of priority for a trunk
These digits are deleted
from the heads of
numbers only when the dialed number and the
group
is
determined
bythe
time prioritytable.
There is also an order of priority for the lines
number stored correspond
and are not dialed out
to the trunk line.
Numbers already stored are canceled by inputting
within each table so that they can be divided up
even more precisely.
Normally they are put together
in trunk groups of
the same type as with
CONF.
MCI and SPRINT.
Trunk Group table
LCR trunk group
Data: Trunk
LCRtrunk group number:
(Dial delete number/Max
I (Special
port number
3#
4#
16 dioits)#
area code table
number
l-1 5)
(1 - 32)
l#(Croup
1):
_
.
,#~22#~#~4#‘js#gC6#i7t8~~
2# (Group 2):
,,6 --------2#3
1#
LCR trunk group number: 8#
(Dial deiete number/Max
16 &its)++
S#
6#
7#
NOTE:
88
May not storing
“* ” and “#“data,
even use rhq FFl 1 and FF72 keys.
3# (Group 3):
l#-2#-3#4#-5#-6#7#-6#4# (Group 4):
1#2#3#4#-5#6f7~8#5# (Group 5):
1%2#3#4ff#-6#7#-8#6# (Group 6):
1#-2#-3#4#-5#6#7#-6#7# (Group 7):
1#2#3%48-5%6#7#-8#8# (Group 8):
I ~-2i~t3#4#-5#-6#7#-8#-
-71-
that
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January l!B0
DBS
FF-8 LCR mode
FF&8#-(l-
8)#-(Max.
16 digit numbers)#
Dial add table storing
The numbers it is desired to add to the heads
of the dial numbers input into each LCR
trunk group are stored.
Up to a maximum
of 16 digits can be added
for dialing. When dialing
using a stored LCR
trunk group, the stored numbers are sent out
first Numbers already stored are canceled by
inputting
CONF.
In addition,
*** and ’ W” are stored by using
the FFl 1 and FFl2 keys.
And pause data are stored by using the
[REDIAL] Key.
LCR trunk
group
number:
1#
(Dial add number/Max
I (Special
area code table
LCR trunk group number: 8#
(Dial add number/Max
16 diaits)#
number
l-15)
16 dioits)#
-72-
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
?‘t
b0 &
FF%Z+-(; -L372)#-(1- 72)#-8
,&t
3 - 9 Copy mode (Trunk and extension
specification
COPY model
Extensionspecification copy mode
The contents which have already been
programmed for one extension are copied into
another extension.
Afterthis reprogramming is easily done by simply
changing the points which are different from the
contents in the original.
All the items programmed are copied with the
exception of the extension number, terminal
classification, ELF port number and lock out code.
When programming
it is necessary to set the same
items fora large number of telephones.
This is likewise the case when setting for outside
lines
Therefore
the trunk
mode are provided
_
setting
with
mode
a copying
and extension
function
so
that the contents set for one telephone
copied into other extensions.
The same is also the case when copying
can be
programmed
lines.
specifications
for outside
DES
FF-9 Copy mode
NN#: Ext. port No. originating copy (1 - 72) - #
NN##: ExL port No. receiving copy (1 - 72) - #
#: Copy implementation
FF9-l#-(1 - 32)#-(1 - 32)#-#
Trunk specification copy mode
The contents which have already been
programmed for one trunk port are copied into
another trunk port
After this reprogramming is easily done by simply
changing the points which are different from the
contents in the original.
All the items programmed are copied with the
exception of the private port number.
FF9-3#-(l- 72)#-(1- 72)#-#
FFKeyfunction copy mode
The programmed data entered in FFSmode for an
extension can be copied to other extensions. Only
the data for LED type keyswill be copied. After
you have entered the source extension port
number (FROM) the DES requests the destination
port number (TO).
At’this point DBSverifiesthatthe
port numbers
entered are correct and you are given the choice
to abort the copy mode if you so choose.
If the port numbers you have entered are incorrect
you can step backwards by pressing the volume up
key repeatedly until you are at the entry point
which needs correction.
NN#: Trunk port number originating copy (1 - 32)
NN#: Trunk port number receiving copy (1 - 32)
#: Copy implementation
NNB: Ext port No. originating copy (1 - 72) - #
NN##: Ext port No. receiving copy (1 - 72) - f
#: Copy implementation
-73-
DBS
FF-10 SPD number
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
mode
3 - 10 Spd’number mode (Speed dial
number settinq
model
Remote
Maintenance
7
Input character for
Remote Maintenance
Input
Forstoring
the system speed number or personal
speed number,
the DSS 172 (DSS console)(VB43320) connected
are used.
to the attendant’s
Auto
I
o-9
l ,#
Pause
“.Start Account
Auto
telephone
ACR1
o-9
l,#
P
B
A
Conf.
I
I
+
-E
F
G
1
0000
Pause
Dial
Dial [l]
-
l
Dial 121
-
Dial [3]
Dial [4]
Dial # Dial [S]
Dial [6]
Dial [7]
Display
---
Dial [B]
Dial [9]
Dial [O]
.
Fig 1 O-l DW72
console(VB-43320)
-74-
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
3.0)
FF-10 SPD number
FFlO-l#-(00-89)#
SystemSPDmode
System Speed Dial numbers 00 - 89 can be
programmed
from the attendant
telephone.
It is also possible toenter
names of up to 16
characters in each SPD numbers using FF6 key (See
Page, 52 )
i FFlO-l#-NN(OO-
89)#-(Telephone
Number)#
NN# : System SPD Dial number
[CONFIB : For clear previous data
FFlO-2#-(01-
72)#
PersonalSPDmode
Personal Speed dial number 90 - 99 can be
programmed
from the attendant
telephone.
\FFl II-2#-NN(Ol-
72)#-SS#(90-99)#-(Telephone
Number)#
NN# : Port number
SS# : Personal
[CONFlP
SPD dial number
: For clear previous
data
-75-
DBS
mode
DES
Remote
SECTION 400 (Version 3.0)
Issue 1 January 1990
Maintenance
Chapter 4 Remote Maintenance
4 - 7 Remote
Maintenance’
B. Remote maintenance mode by
attendant’s telephone
Outline
Programming
can be done from outside the
system through
telephone
lines other that for the
attendant’s
telephone.
In such a case the
Having
programming
is done from data terminals
available
on the market and the like. In addition
to the normal programming
when operating
from
oupide,
it is also possible
by memory dumping.
4 - 2 Starting
Remote
put on hold after
calling
the patty which
is to carry out the remote maintenance
with
the attendant’s
telephone,
the remote
maintenance
processing is enabled by having
the special remote maintenance
number input
The remote maintenance
processing
is then
made possible by inputting
the special remote
maintenance
number (86) and the 4 digit code.
to check all the set DATA
Maintenance
There are two methods for stating
remote
maintenance.
The first method is to do the
In either
operation
completely
from outside
by using the
DISA function for achieving
the remote
maintenance
status after having telephoned
the
cases the following
message
is output on the remote side to indicate
now in the remote maintenance
mode.
of the above
that it is
system from outside.
The second method is to
put the system in hold with the attendant’s
telephone
to achieve the remote maintenance
status.
A. Remote maintenance mode with
DISA
After the system has answered
the call made to
the trunk line specified in the systems DISA, the
DISA function can be used by inputting
the
DISA code (not necessary with some system
settings). Then the remote maintenance
processing is made possible
special remote maintenance
4 - 3 Remote
having inputthe
number
(#6) and
the 4 digit code for remote controlled
maintenance(code
9999 when not set).
Maintenance
There are 3 modes
forthe
processing.
When the remote
maintenance
enters
following
each of the
INPUT -[PI’
INPUT ‘Ctrl
remote
maintenance
mode
processing
starts, it
modes.
Programming
INPUT ‘[Dl’
-76
Processing
[Z]”
Memory
dumping
Remote
maintenance
complete
SECTION 400 (Version
Issue 1 January 1990
4 - 4 Effective
3.0)
DBS
Remote
Number
of Digits
Maintenance
for input
Data
DUMP>
When the number input is less than 3 digits, 0 is
entered to make a number of 3 digits.
When it is more than 3 digits, the last 3 digits only
are taken while the rest are disregarded.
:-ol.i
lO#lO
12345-345
1000~00,
of Memory
Dump
bytes. If the number
of bytes is not specified,
100(H) bytes are automatically
displayed.
Function
DUMP > table name + offset address - number of
bytes output
<CR> 4 letters : 0 - 10, A - F(H) 4
During maintenance
and the like the systems
software data can be confirmed
from outside.
This is extremely
useful when a breakdown
occurs
letters: 0- lO,AF(H)
If the specified table name
for example.
By means of memory dump data can be outputto
the data terminal
CRT or printerwhen
the table
Memory
Dump
The memory
inputting
Function
to the remote
I
MEMORY
DUMP
The remote
by inputting
MODE
dump,
the error
operation
is completed
+ [C]” to return
by
to the remote
mode.
of Remote
Maintenance
maintenance
operation
-[Ctri] + [Z]“. If “[Ctri]
is completed
+ [Z]” is input
while programs are being selected or data are
being entered, it becomes the remote
maintenance
start mode. So when ‘[Ctri] + [Z]” is
I
I
has been displayed,
the
is displayed
while waiting
“[Ctrl]
4 - 8 Completion
side.
-
After the message
following
prompt
dump
maintenance
for
of Memory Dump
4 - 7 Completion
When the D command
is input on the initial screen
for remote
maintenance,
the following
message is
output
is intended
something
other than memory
message is displayed.
name for the memory area you want displayed
and the number of display bytes are specified.
4 - 6 Starting
-
The memory dump area is specified in accordance
with the table number and the number of display
to all lLhe remote
This restriction
is common
maintenance
modes.
4 - 5 Outline
i
input
again in this status, the
outside
line being
used forthe remote maintenance
is released and
the remote maintenance
is completed.
In the
following
cases also the outside line is
A When data have not been input
for
for more than
16 minutes
data input.
8. When the outside line is cut off automatically
released to complete
the remote maintenance
operation.
-77-
Section 700
Issue 1
Juiy 1990
S-DBS 308/616 (VI .O)
Operating
Instructions
Small
Digital
Business
308’6’6.
System
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not
be construed as a commitment by the Panasonic Communications ,231Systems
Company (PCSC). Furthermore, PCSC reserves the right, without notice, to make
changes to equipment design as advance in engineering and manufacturing methods
warrant.
S-DBS Operating Instructions
VI .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
FCC RULES
(Part 68)
AND REGUTIONS
In compliance with the requirements of Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations for
connection of terminal equipment to the telephone network, and for your convenience,
the following information is presented.
Notifying
the Telephone
Company
When connecting or disconnecting the terminal equipment to the telephone network,
inform the telephone company of the particular line (s) for connection, the FCC
registration number and ringer equivalence number of the registered terminal
equipment.
FCC Registration
Model Numbers
VB-42010
(DBS308)
VB-42020
(DBS616)
Numbers
Key System
ACKUSA-61853~KF-E
ACKUSA-6 1854~KF-E
Hybrid
System
ACKUSA-61855sMF-E
ACKUSA-61856-MF-E
When enabling Pooled Trunk Access, inform the telephone company or a Panasonic
service center of the Ml?-E FCC Registration number. According to FCC rules, Pooled
Trunk Access is regarded as one of the distinguishing features of a PBX as opposed
to a key telephone system.
RINGER
EQUIVALENCE
NUMBER
(REN)
0.5 B
The REN determines the number of devices you may connect to your telephone line
and still have all those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most,
but not all areas, the sum of the REWs of all devices connected to one line should not
exceed five (5.0). You should contact your local telephone company to determine the
maximum REN for your calling area.
Service order code
Network address signaling code
Facility interface code
Required network interface code
Connection
to a Party
Direct Connection
Line
9.OF
E
02LS2 (2 wire/Loop
RJ25C
or Coin Operated
Telephone
start)
Line
to a Party Line or Coin Operated Telephone Line Is Prohibited.
If you are on a party line, check with your local telephone company for further
information.
...
Ill
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Incidence
of Harm to the Telephone
Lines
Should terminal equipment
cause harm to the telephone network. the telephone company shall. where
nractical.no~~Ilusto~r
that temnorary
discontinuance
ofsmce ~- maybe --- required.
-- ___. However,
where prior notice is not practical,
the telephone
company
may temporarily
discontinue
service
In case of un-notlffed
temporary
forthwith.
if such action is reasonable
in the circumstances.
. discontinuance
of service. the telephone company shall:
(Al
Promptly
[email protected]
(B)
Afford the customer
discontinuance.
(Cl
Inform the customer
of the right to bring a complaint
to the Commfssl
procedures
set out in Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations.
Compatibility
(Al
Availability
the customer
of such temporary
the opportunity
of the Telephone
of telephone
to correct
Network
dfscontinuance
the situation
of service.
which
and Terminal
gave rise to the temporary
on pursuant
to the
Equipment
information
Technical information
oninterface
parameters
and specifications
not set by FCC Rules, including
the number of ringers which may be connected to a particular
telephone line to permit terminal
equipment
to operate
in a manner
compatible
with telephone
company
communications
facilities. shah be provided by the telephone company upon customer’s
request.
(B)
Changes
in telephone
procedures.
company
communications
facilities.
equipment,
operatlons
and
The telephone
company
may make changes in its communications
facilities.
equipment,
operations
or procedures.
where such action is reasonably
required
in the operation
of its
business and is not inconsistent
with the rules and regulations
in FCC Part 68. If such changes
can be reasonably
expected to render any customers
terminal equipment
incompatible
with
telephone
company
communications
facilities or require modification
or alteration
of such
terminal equipment
or otherwise materially
affect Its use or performance,
the customer shall be
given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity
to maintain un-interrupted
service.
Hearing Aid Compatibility
This system
is hearing-aid
Automatic
Dialers
When Programming
compatible.
Emergency Numbers or Making Test Calls to Emergency Numbers:
(A)
Remain
on the line and briefly
(B)
Perform
such
iv
activities
explain
in the off-peak
to the d&patcher
hours,
the reason
such as early morning
for the call.
or late evening.
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
Responsibility
The Grantee
of Grantee (Manufacturer)
or its agent
shall
the user of the registered
(C)
Instruction
indicating
that when trouble is experienced
the customer
shall disconnect
the
If so, the
registered equipment
from the telephone line to determine whether it is malfunctioning.
use of such equipment
shall be discontinued
until the problem has been corrected.
(D)
If connections
other than
RI25C
equipment
are needed.
procedures,
where
the following:
Notification
terminal
and repair
with
(B)
that the registered
operation
equipment
Instructions
Please
installation.
Equipment
(Al
Product
concerning
provide
of Registered
may not be usedwith
contact
applicable.
party lines or coin lines.
the local telephone
company.
Safety
Observe
the Following
Guidelines
is an electrlcal
to Assure
the Safe Use of Your
(A)
This product
(B)
To avoid the risk of electrical shock do not use this unit while in the bathtub,
shower, or when
wet. If you [email protected] drop the unit into water. unplug it first, then retrieve it by pulling the cord.
(Cl
The telephone
should not be exposed to heat sources. direct
moisture,
strong vibrations.
greasy or dusty environments.
(D)
Never attempt
(E)
Never clean the telephone
to insert
device and can be hazardous
wires,
pins or similar
with benzol,
IFr-~-~~~~~~-~~l~~~~~~~d~~~~
paint
Never install
telephone
(H)
Never touch
disconnected
un-insulated
telephone
wires
at the network interface.
Radio
in water.
sunlight.
extreme
objects
in the vents or openings
thinner
or other solvent
___-__--.
lightningstorrrii
(G)
if immersed
Telephone
jacks in a wet area unless they are specilically
or terminals
unless
temperatures,
of the telephone.
materials.
-..
designed
for that purpose.
the telephone
line has been
(Part 15)
Interference
Warning
- This unit generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions
manual. the unit may cause radio interference.
The Unit has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant
to Part 15 of FCC Rules,
which are designed to provide reasonable
protection
against such Interference
when operated in a
commercial
environment.
Operation
of this equipment
in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference
the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures
necessary
interference.
in which case
to correct the
If necessary,
the user should
additional
suggestions.
consult
technlclan
The user may find the follow
booklet
the dealer
prepared
Something
This booklet
Is available
or an experienced
by the Federal
about
from the FCC local regional
Communtcations
Interference
ofl3xs.
radio/television
Commission
for
helpful:
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
Table of Contents
FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS
Nothing
the Telephone
Company..
(Part 68) ...................................................
...................................................................................
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER (REN) 0.5 B .............................................
Connection to a Party Line or Coin Operated Telephone IJne ..........................
Incidence of Harm to the Telephone,Lines .......................................................
Compatibility of the Telephone Network and TerminaI Equipment.. .................
Hearing Aid Compatibility ...............................................................................
Automatic Dialers ...........................................................................................
Responsibility of Grantee (Manufacturer) of Registered Equipment ..................
Product Safety .................................................................................................
Radio Interference
(Part 15) ...........................................................................
INTRODUCTION
. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~................................
...
ill
...
Ill
...
ill
iii
iv
iv
iv
iv
.v
V
V
1
S-DBS HYBRID SYSTEM * <Progr amming Required> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 2
DATA TERMINAL PROGRAMMING
~-~..
. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
PARTS AND FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. 4
_.-.--..--.- .--
.-..
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
FLEXIBLE
. .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . 5
FUNCTION (FF) KEYS ........................................................
How to program the FF keys ............................................................................
How to program the One-Touch keys ...............................................................
ADJUSTING
6
7
7
DISPLAY CONTRASI+ AND VOLUME LEVEL.. ................. .8
POOLED TRUNK ACCESS GROUP .....................................................
HEADSET MODE * <Programming
Required> ...................................
INTERNAL DIAL TONE STOP * <F’rogr amming
9
10
Required> . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. 10
PAGING ZONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
. . . .--.. .----__
. . . . . . . . __.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . 11
PLACING OUTSIDE LINE CALLS
- _-... -.. . .._.__
Making a CaII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~............. 11
Dial CO (Outside Line) Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
vii
i
\
‘a&
a
Section700
issue1 July1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
To access a direct dial outside line ..................................................................................
Pooled Trunk Access * <Programming Required> ...........................................
To access a pooled trunk group line with a one-touch key ...............................................
Flash Key * <Programming
Required> ............................................................
11
12
12
12
INTERCOM CALLS . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 13
Attendant
_....___.-..-.....-._
Calls .............................................................................................
Other Extensions ..........................................................................................
To make a voice call ........................................................................................................
To change to a tone call ...................................................................................................
Answering Calls from Other Extensions .........................................................
Hands-Free Answer Back ..............................................................................
To answer a Voice call without picking up the receiver ....................................................
Intercom Hold ...............................................................................................
To place a call on Hold ....................................................................................................
To release a call on Hold ..................................................................................................
Call Waiting * <Programming
Required> ........................................................
To set Call Waiting ..........................................................................................................
To answer Call Waiting during an outside line/internal call .............................................
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
15 .
15
15
15
ANSWERING OUTSIDE LINE CALLS . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~.... 16
Automatic Answer .........................................................................................
To answer an outside line call on a ringing telephone ......................................................
To answer an outside call on a telephone that is not ringing ............................................
Call Pickup Directed ......................................................................................
Call Pickup Group .........................................................................................
16
16
16
16
17
HOLDING CALLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Outside Line Hold .........................................................................................
To
To
To
To
place a call on Exclusive Hold .....................................................................................
release a call from Exclusive Hold ...............................................................................
place a call on System Hold ........................................................................................
release a call from System Hold ..................................................................................
18
18
18
18
18
CONFERENCE CALIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . ..*..................
19
To add on an outside line .. ... .. ... .... .. .. .. ... .. ... ... .... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. .. ... ... ... .. .. ... .. ... ... ... .. .. ... 19
To add on an extension .. ... ... .. ... .. .... .. .... ... .. .... ... ... ... .. ... .... .. .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... ... .. .. .. . 19
To exit a conference call .. .. .. ... ... .. .... .. ..... .. ... ... ... .... .. .. ..... . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. ... .. ... ... ... .. ... .. .. ... 19
Privacy Release . . ..*.........................................................................................
...
VIII
20
”
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
NIGHT KEY * <Use the attendant’s
To change
from day mode to night mode
TRANSFERRING
phone> .......................................
......... . ...............................................................
CALLS ....................................................................
On-Hook (Automatic) Transfer * <Programming
.___-.-......--.
Required> ....... . .....................
call ...............................................................................................
To transfer
a screened
To transfer
an unscreened
call ........................................................................................
............................................................................................
Manual
... .-..... ~- ..Transfer
-._...
BUSY/NO ANSWER MODE ...............................................................
Busy Override * <Programming Required> .....................................................
Call Forwarding .............................................................................................
....................................................................................................
To set Call Forwarding
To cancel
Call Forwarding
Do-Not-Disturb
.............................................................................................
To set Do-Not-Disturb
To cancel
.....................................................................................................
Do-Not-Disturb
Message Waiting/Call
To leave a Message
To answer
...............................................................................................
................................................................................................
Back Request ..............................................................
Waiting/Call
a Call Back request
Back Request
................................................................
.......................................................................................
Tlhn.k Queuing .............................................................................................
To set Trunk Queuing ....................................................................................................
To respond to a Tn~nk Queuing alert tone .......................................................................
off!!~--&-~~-~~~~
; <fio-gmg.mTmE&
...................................
......................................................................................
To make a Voice Announcement
To answer
a Voice Announcement
(Talk-Back
Key) ..........................................................
AUDIBLE FEATURES .......................................................................
Alarm ............................................................................................................
TosettheAlarm
To cancel
..............................................................................................................
the Alarm
........................................................................................................
Delayed Ring/No Answer l <Programming Required> ....................................
Paging * <Programming Required> .................................................................
Zone Paging ..................................................................................................
All-Zone Paging .............................................................................................
Background Music (BGM) ..............................................................................
Meet-Me Answer ............................................................................................
To answer
a paged call ....................................................................................................
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
25
25
.25
26
.26
26
27
27
2i
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
30
30
30
30
Section 700
Issue I July 1990
S-DBS Operating instructions
VI .o
Outside Line Off-Hook Signal * &rogramming
DIALING ALTERNATIVES
Required> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*......... 30
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 31
Redial ............................................................................................................
To check a redialed number ............................................................................................
Save/Repeat Dial ..........................................................................................
To save a dialed number .................................................................................................
To check a saved number ...............................................................................................
To repeat a dialed number.. ............................................................................................
Personal Speed Dial (PSD) .............................................................................
To store PSD Numbers to a One-Touch key .....................................................................
To access a stored PSD number ......................................................................................
To check a stored PSD number .......................................................................................
To cancel a stored PSD number .......................................................................................
System Speed Dial (SSD) ...............................................................................
To
To
To
To
31
31
32
-32
.32
-32
33
33
34
-34
34
35
store SSD Numbers * <Available only on extensions 10 and 1l> ................................ .35
access a stored SSD number ......................................................... ............................ .36
check an SSD number * <Available on all extensions> ................................................ 36
cancel a stored SSD number ............ .............................................................................. 36
Assigning Two SSD Codes to a Single One-Touch Key ....................................
DTMF Signal Conversion ...............................................................................
DATA SECURITY * <Programming
Required> . . . . .. ..*...........................
37
38
38
39
ACCOUNT CODES/SMDR . . . . ... . . . . ..Y...................................................
Code
- -..
.. .-Station MessageDetail Recorder (SMDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
.~.---- --Account
--
To enter an Account Code before dialing out ... .. ... .. ... . ... . ... .. ... .. ... .. .. .. ...~........................... 39
To enter an Account Code during an outside call ... .. ... . .. ... ... ..-......................................... 40
TOLL RESTRICTIONS
.......................................................................
41
41
Toll Restriction System * @rogramming Required> .......................................
41
Station Lockout * <Programming Required> ..................................................
41
To set or reset Station Lockout ........................................................................................
To program Station Lockout code * <Available only on extensions 10. 1l> ....................... 42
DOOR BOX ......................................................................................
43
43
Door Boxes A and B * <Programming Required> ............................................
43
To call a door box ............................................................................................................
To answer a door box call . .. .. .. ... .. .. ... .... .. ... ... ... .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . ... .. ... ... .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . 43
x
__-
.__......
- _--..----- --
-S-DBS Operating instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
Door Opener ..................................................................................................
Speaking
Opening
to a door box caller ...........................................................................................
a door box without
Sensor * cProgramming
Cancelling
a warning
speaking
to caller
................................................................
Required> ................................................................
tone from an extension
...................................................................
Index ................................................................................................
43
43
43
44
44
46
xi
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
INTRODUCTION
The Panasonic S-DBS 308/616 has a smaller, compact KSU. 19” L x 4 l/2” H x 12
l/2” W, that can be hung on a wall or placed in an out-of-the-way space. Despite its
convenient size the S-DBS has many of the features of a larger KSU, in addition to a
Hybrid telephone system that gives you the capability of a dual port operation using
a key telephone and single line devices.
The S-DBS is also hearing-aid compatible with a proprietary
telephone.
There are four models of S-DBS telephones:
VB-43233
34 Key Speakerphone w/LCD
Used for Ex-tensions 10,ll
VB-42213
16 Key Speakerphone
VB-42211
16 Key Speakerphone
VB-42210
16 Key Basic Phone w/HFAB
w/LCD
_---~
..- ---
- ----
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
S-DBS HYBRID
SYSTEM
* <Programming
Required>
The small DBS introduces a brand new feature in telephone systems: A dual port
connection. The S-DBS Hybrid System allows you to connect both a digital telephone
and a single line device to the same extension port at the same time. A cordless
telephone, answering machine or Fax machine can be used alternatively with a key
telephone once the system is set in one of three modes as follows:
A mode:
Both the key telephone and the single line device are operable which
means that you have the option of transferring calls from your key
telephone to your cordless phone and back again by pressing the
HOLD key on the key (proprietary) telephone or hook flashing on the
SLT and dialing 60 . Only the key telephone rings and on the SLT the
intercom dial tone is a stutter tone.
B mode:
In B mode you can leave the system unattended in either day or night
mode because the key telephone does not operate. The blinking
Do-Not-Disturb
LED on the key telephone indicates that there is no
dial tone. Only the single line device is operable.
For example, you can set up an answering machine to take calls for
the system or for each telephone. To go from A to B mode and have
an answering machine record your calls for the system, put the system
on night mode from the attendant’s telephone by pressing the ON/OFF
key, # key and entering 52. During the day you have the option,
among others, of switching operation from your stationary single line
telephone to a cordless phone by entering 69 from your extension.
C mode:
Redial~..---
.--.
Station
In C mode you can set the dual extension port for a single line device
only to set up a Fax machine, for example, or a single line telephone.
See instructions for the key telephone in this manual. For the SLT see
instructions in the Station User Guide, Section 750 under Single Line
Telephone.
..- ---- ---.- lockout See instructions in this manual.
Programming
2
extension features Ask your authorized dealer.
__
.Se~io*‘j100-.-
S-DBS Operating instructions
Vl .o
_--__
Issue 1 July 1990
DATA TERlMINAL
PROGRAMMING
In addition to progr amming from the key terminal you can also program the system
A computer gives you the advantage of checking tie
using a data terminal.
programming steps on the display before making final changes. At every stage in the
programming there are help screens available by pressing the “H” key on the terminal.
Ask your authorized dealer for more details.
S-DBS Operating Instructions
VI .o
PARTS
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
AND FEATURES
1. Receiver
2. Speaker for ringing, tone and voice
3. Dialing Keys
Key
4. REDIAL
Key
5. FIASH
6. ON/OFF
Key
7. HOLD
Fixed
Key & LED
Function
8. -DND/CF
..y--..--.9-:EXT’
01
e
0.
0
Keys:
LED
LED ..
10. -MUTE LED
11. -MSGE LED
12. Line/FF Keys
Model shown above: VB-43233
DSS Telephone for Extensions 10 and 11
13. Line LED
14. One-Touch Keys
15. Display
16. PROG Key
17. MUTE
Key
18. CONF Key
19. AUTO Key
20. VOL V Key, VOL
Model shown above: VB-42213
4
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
SYSTEM
VI .o
CONFIGURATION
You can connect four types of DBS extensions to the two main cabinets 308 and 616.
/ DBS308
/
1 DBS616
j
* Each system
2
3
I
16
I
14
I
2
I
2
2
accommodates up to 2 DSS telephones VB-43233.
** Outside lines are divided into 4 groups: 9, 81, 82 and 83.
1
Single Line Telepr;e
-
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
-rLSmB-LE
FUNCTION-- (FF) KEYS .-- .-
The DSS telephone has a total of 24 keys. Keys l-6 are generally assigned as CO
(outside) lines. However, ifall six keys are not assigned as CO lines, some of them can
be used as additional FFkeys. Keys 7-2 1 are extension numbers, key 22 is Call Pickup
. Group, key 23 is All-zone Paging and key 24 is the night key.
The LED functions
on the CO line keys, but does not light on the FF keys.
Some of the followi.ngFF key features can also be programmed on One-Touch keys and
are noted as such.
Save
SMDR
Station Lockiout
Tone Calls
Trunk Queuing
Off-Hook Voice Announce
Off-Hook Voice Announce
6
Answer
AUTO, AUTO,
#93
74
1
2
5
+3
l
X
X
X
X
X
X
32
39
41
13
26
27
27
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
How to program the FF keys:
Press ON/OFF key
1.
--
2.
Press PROG key
3.
Press FF key
4.
Enter key code (4 digits maximum)
5.
Press HOLD key
6.
Press ON/OFF key
the One-Touch keys:
.._--- How
~. . .to program
-.---Press ON/OFF key
1.
2.
Press PROG key
3.
Press One-Touch key (each telephone has 10 One-Touch keys).
4.
Dial number (16 digits maximum)
5.
Press HOLD key
6.
Press ON/OFF key
__.-..-..- -
S-DBS Operating Instructions
VI .o
ADJUSTING
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
AND VOLUME
LEVEL
Display Contrast
_-.-_- ...--.-..._.-..-.-You can adjust the contrast to 16 different levels.
1.
With receiver in place press # key.
2.
Press VOL v to dim the display.
3.
Press VOL A to brighten the display.
Volume Levels
You can adjust the volume to five different levels.
Ring Volume
While the phone is ringing
1.
Press VOL v to lower the sound level of the ring.
2.
Press VOL A to raise the sound level of the ring.
Dial Tone Volume
While sound is coming from the speaker
1.
Press VOL v to lower the voice level of the speaker.
2.
Press VOL A to raise the voice level of the speaker.
Receiver
Volume
While talking on the telephone
1.
Press VOL v to lower the level of your voice.
2.
Press VOL A to raise the level of your voice.
NOTE: Voice level on the receiver will return to the normal level after you hang up.
8
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
POOLED
TRUNK
ACCESS
GROUP
You can install from l-3 or l-6 outside lines in the system and then divide the lines
into four groups: local calls; low-cost: long distance; and data communications.
Each group has a fxed code, 9 or 8 1.82 and 83, to access lines in that group. Entering
one of these codes automatically opens a line within the Pooled Trunk Access Group.
Or you can store the group code (Pooled Trunk Access Code) in an FF key or on a OneTouch key and access the feature that way.
NOTE: To operate this phone system as a Hybrid System, modifications must be
made by a quaWed dealer for proper re-configuration
and registration
procedures.
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
HEADSET
MODE * Programming
Required>
Aheadset can be connected to any phone in the system and the intercom dial tone can
be turned off so that it cannot be heard through the headset.
To set or cancel headset mode:
1.
Connect Headset to telephone
2.
Press ON/OFF key
3.
Dial#51
4.
Press ON/OFF key
NOTE:
Use only an electret Headset.
INTERNAL
DIAL TONE STOP * <Programming
Required>
To set or cancel intercom dial tone stop:
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial # 50
3.
Press ON/OFF
Ask your authorized
key
dealer for more details.
PAGING ZONES
Internal paging uses the speakers in the extension phones.
While one extension can belong to several paging zones, only 3 paging zones are
allowed in each system.
You canuse the telephone speakers for all the paging groups. If the location is noisy
and requires higher volume, you can add peripheral equipment to the system.
10
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
PLACING
OUTSIDE
LINE
CALLS
MIakingaCall
1.
._..--
2;
Press a line key. The ON/OFF key will light
------.--
3.
Dial the telephone number
Pick up receiver
Dial CO (Outside
To access a direct
Line) Access
dial outside line
pick up the receiver
1.
OR
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Listen for intercom dial tone
-__----
___-.--.-
.-
3.
Get external dial tone by dialing the access code 88 plus the line
number.
4.
Dial the telephone number.
display.
The dialed number will appear on the
Section 700
issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
VI .o
Pooled Trunk Access * <Programming
To access a pooled trunk
Required>
group line with a one-touch
key
Pick up receiver
1.
OR
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Get outside dial tone by dialing access code 9 or 81. 82 or 83.
3.
Dial the telephone number.
display.
The dialed number wiU appear on the
NOTE: To operate this phone system as a Hybrid System, modifications must be
made by a qutied
dealer for proper re-configuration
and registration
procedures.
Flash Key * <Programming
Required>
To make another call without either replacing the receiver or pressing the ON/OFF
key to get new dial tone.
1.
Get dial tone by briefly pressing the FLASH key. To disconnect from
PBX lines press the FLASH key for more than one second.
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
INTERCOM
Attendant
CALLS
Calls
You can call the attendant on extension 10 from any other extension by pressing the
0 (OPER) key.
Pick up the receiver
-_.-.
Press ON/OFF key
Press 0
2.
Other Extensions
Calls to other extensions can be either voice or tone. The system is set for voice call,
but you may change to tone by pressing 1 after dialing an extension number. Once
changed the only way you can revert back to voice is to hang up and redial the
extension number. On an SLT only tone calls are possible.
To make a voice call
Pick up the receiver
1.
OR
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Key in the extension number. For the 308 the extension range is 10
to 17. Forthe616theextensionrangeislOto25.
TheEXTLEDwill
light red on the phone of the person you call and a splash tone will be
heard followed by your voice.
To change to a tone call
1.
Press 1 during an intercom voice call. The EXT LED will blink red on
your phone and a ring pattern will begin on the called extension.
NOTE: Mute key of the person you call must be set to ON.
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Answering
Calls from Other Extensions
1.
Pick up the receiver
OR
Press the ON/OFF key
2.
__..----_.
The EXT LED lights red
-
.-..-..
3.
Hands-Free
..-....
.-.
-
_ _.
The number of the calling extension will appear on display.
Answer Back
To answer a Voice call without
picking
up the receiver
1.
The MUTE LED must be off to talk without picking up the receiver.
2
If the MUTE LED is on, press the MUTE key to turn it off.
Intercom
Hold
You can answer one other intercom call by placing your original call on HOLD. You
can, then, toggle back and forth between the two calls creating a broker’s hold.
_ _ _-- ._...---
--.--T~.~CalLOXlEOld-..-
_..-__---
---
1.
Press HOLD key
2.
The Em LED will flash red and the extension number of the first call
will be replaced on the display by the extension number of the second
Cdl.
74
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
To release a call on Hold
1.
Press HOLD key.
2.
The EXT LED will stop flashing.
NOTE: There is no Hold recall for Intercom Hold.
Call Waiting
l
cprogrcUnming
Required>
To set Call Waiting
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial the extension number and wait for the busy signal.
3.
To send the Call-Wait tone to the extension, press 3 while you
can still hear the busy signal. The EXT LED of the called party will
flash red.
To answer Call Waiting during an outside line/internal
call
1.
Press HOLD key
2.
The first call is held and you are automatically connected to the
waiting caller. The new extension number will appear on the display.
NOTE: Call Waiting is automatically canceled once you replace the receiver. This
feature is not active ifthe called extension is set to DND; already has a call
on hold; is ringing or is on a conference call. An alert tone will signal that
Call Waiting is not in effect.
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
ANSWERING
Automatic
OUTSIDE
LINE
CALLS
Answer
To answer an outside line call on a ringing telephone
Pick up the receiver when the line LED blinks red. The LED will light
green.
1.
OR
Press ON/OFF key. The key M
___ _.- .--..
To answer an outside
call on a telephone
then light green
--
-..... -
-..-_-__.
-
that is not ringing
1.
Pick up the receiver
2.
Press the line key that is slowly flashing red. It will light green.
NOTE: Aranidlv flashing red LED indicates that the outside call has been answered
and placed on hold by another telephone.
Cdl
Pickup Directed
You can answer incoming
calls such as intercom tone calls, call waiting, paging,
transferred calls, recall and call reversion at other extensions outside your paging
group with directed call pickup. Directed call pickup can also be programmed on a
one-touch key.
Pick up receiver
1.
OR
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial 79
3.
Dial number of the ringing extension
16
S-DBS Operating Instructions
VI .o
Section 700
issue 1 July 1990
Call Pickup Group
You can answer incorning calls or intercom tone calls to other extensions in your paging
group without entering the number of the ringing extension. The lowest port number
is answered first if there are several calls at one time.
Pick up the receiver
1.
OR
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial 70
3.
The EXT LED lights red
NOTE: You cannot use this feature during paging, alarm ring, talk-back
call-back requests.
___- ..-
...---------__
---
ring or
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
VI .o
.I ,
HOLDING
CALLS
Outside Line Hold
There are two methods of placing an outside caller on hold. Exclusive hold restricts
the release of a hold only to the extension that put the call on hold. System hold is
not restricted and the call can be picked up at any extension.
To place a call on Exclusive
Hold
1.
Press the green line key, it will flash ranidlv and you will hear a continuous tone.
2.
Press ON/OFF key
OR
Replace the receiver
To release a call from Exclusive
Hold
Press the rapidlv flashing green LED line key, it will stop flashing and
blink green.
1.
To place a call on System Hold
Not restricted - any extension can release a system hold.
1.
Press HOLD key. The green LED line will flash ranidlv and you will
hear a continuous
dial tone.
Press ON/OFF key.
2.
OR
~
Replace the receiver
To release a call from System Hold
1.
Press the raDidlv flashing LED line, it will blink green.
NOTE: If a call on hold is not answered within a specific time, a hold recall tone will
sound. cProgramming
Required>
18
.-_~.
S-DBS Operating Instructions
..Section~lQO.- _.-...
Issue 1 July 1990
CONFERENCE
Vl .o
CALLS
You can add on an outside line to either an outside line call or an intercom call for a
three-party conference. The system can accommodate up to three conference calls at
the same time.
To add on an outside line
1.
Pressing the HOLD key or the line key will put the current call on hold.
2.
Press a line key not in use. It will &&
tone.
3.
Dial telephone number
4.
Press CONF key when the called party answers.
green and you will hear a dial
To add on an extension
1.
Pressing either the HOLD key or the line key will put the current call
on hold.
2.
Dial extension number.
3.
Press CONF key when the extension answers by either picking up the
receiver or pressing the ON/OFF key.
To exit a conference
1.
call
Press FLASH key
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Privacy Release
To allow a three-party
your phone.
conference call you have to release the privacy restriction
1.
Press CQNF key
2.
Give the third party your line number.
3.
The third party must
conference call.
NIGHT KEY * dke
To chanie
press the same line number
the attendant’s
from day &ode to night mode:
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial # 52
3.
Press ON/OFF
to join
the
phone>
-” --
key
On the DSS telephone F’F key 24 is the night key.
Ask your authorized dealer for more details to set the system to automatically
to night mode.
20
on
switch
Section 700
~ss~e-f&&+~~~~.-
--....-- -__...._
_--_e---------._..-.
TRANSFERRING
On-Hook (Automatic)
To transfer
S-DBS Operating Instructions
.~
Vl .o
CALLS
Transfer
* <Programming
Required>
a screened call
1.
Press HOLD to put the outside call on hold. The line LED will flash
green and you will hear a continuous dial tone.
2.
Dial the extension number and call by voice.
3.
If not answered, press 1 to change to tone.
4.
Once the call is answered and the extension user is informed of the
transfer. hang up. The line LED for the call on hold lights red.
To transfer
an unscreened
call
You can transfer calls directly to another extension without
_____.-.
screening them.
1.
Press HOLD key. The line LED will flash green and you will hear a
continuous dial tone.
2.
Dial the extension number.
3.
Hang up. The line LED of the held call blinks red.
NOTE: You cannot transfer a call to an extension set for DND. The transferred call
will revert back to you if it is not answered within a specific time.
.--
------
--
S-DBS Operating Instructions
VI .o
Manual Transfer
1.
Press HOLD key. The line LED will flash green.
2.
Key in the extension number and call by voice.
3.
If not answered. press 1 to change to tone.
4.
When the call is’answered announce the call.
5.
Press PROG key
.
Ha-t% UP
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating lnstmctions
VI .o
Section 700
issue 1 July 1990
BUSY/NO
ANSWER
Busy Override
MODE
* @fogramming
Required>
To access a busy outside line you can program the system to allow another station to
enter an &sting conversation preceded by a waming tone.
1.
Press the line key in use
2.
An alert tone sounds to warn the user of the interruption.
NOTE: Both your extension and the busy extension must belong to the same
paging group to activate this feature.
Call Fonuarding
___. -__.
If a station is unattended,
ex&sion.
all incorning calls are automatically
forwarded to another
To set Call Forwarding
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial 72
3.
Dial extension number
4.
Press ON/OFF key The DND/CF
LED lights red
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
To cancel Call Forwarding
- __- .
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial 72
3.
Press ON/OFF key. The DND/CF LED goes off
Do-Not-Disturb
Do-Not-Disturb
allows you to temporarily block most incoming calls to your
extension. Only CalBack queuing and recalls are not blocked. Once DND is set, the
Call Forwarding feature is cancelled.
To set Do-Not-Disturb
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial 73
3.
Press ON/OFF key. The DND/CF
LED will &g& red
To cancel Do-Not-Disturb
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial 73
3.
Press ON/OFF key. The DND/CF
24
LED goes out
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
issue 1 July 1990
Message Waiting/Call
Back Request
You can leave a message at another extension requesting a return call.
..____~. ___.~..~
To leave a Message Waiting/Call
Back Request
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial the extension number
3.
Dial 2 at the sound of the busy signal or while the phone is still ringing.
4.
Press ON/OFF key
5.
MSGE LED will blink red on the busy extension.
To answer a Call Back request
1.
Pick up receiver
2.
Press AUTO key
3.
Press REDIAL key to automatically
Call Back request.
_--..- _
dial the extension which left the
OR
4.
Press FLASH key to cancel MSGE LED.
Section 700
issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
You can set a system alert tone to signal you when a line becomes free ifall the outside
lines or bxnk goups are busy.
To set Trunk Queuing
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press busy line key
3.
Dial 2
4.
When you hear a continuous dial tone the Iine is set for an alert tone.
To respond to a ‘hunk
1.
___...-._ -.--.
Queuing alert tone
Pick up the receiverwithin
~_
16 seconds or Punk
Queuing is cancelled.
._,... _~ ._.
2.
Listen for the outside dial tone
3.
Begin dialing
NOTE: If an incoming
call rings on the line key set for Trunk
Queuing it is
suspended for the duration of the incoming calI. It is also cancelled after
20 minutes if not used within that time.
This feature is also available on an SLT.
26
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
Off-Hook
Voice Announce
* <Programming
Required>
Ifyou try to make an intercom call to a busy extension, you can interrupt
make an announcement that can be heard only by the called party.
-___To make a Voice ~ouncement
the call and
.--.
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial the extension number
3.
Press 5 at the sound of a busy signal.
4.
Make your announcement.
Your voice will be heard only on the
extension not the outside line.
To answer a Voice Announcement
1.
Press the Talk Back key (if programmed), or dial * 3. The first call
can still be heard but your speech path is only to the internal caller.
2.
Press the Talk Back key or dial + 3 again to return your speech path
to the -first call and to automatically disconnect the Voice Announce
caller.
NOTE: The Talk Back key (W 3) can be stored under an F’F key or One-touch key
to activate this feature.
During Off-Hook Voice Announce you can not go back and forth between
the first and second call.
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
AUDIBLE
FEATURES
A 16-second alarm wiII sound at a set time. If you are on a &I
alarm wiI.I not sound until you hang up.
..--To-set
the.-
-.-
at the set time, the
-
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial # 4
3.
Key in the time using a la-hour
4.
Press 1 for A.M.
foimat followed by code 1 or 2.
OR
5.
Press 2 for P.M.
For example, 3:35 P.M. = 03352.
A 16-second alarm wiI.I sound at 3:35 P.M.
_~____.
--~
6.
To cancel.the
-
Press ON/OFF key
Alarm
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Dial # 4
3.
Press ON/OFF key
Delayed Ring/No
Answer * <Programming
Required>
Normally, if an incoming call to your extension is not answered within a set time, the
extension programmed with Delayed Ring wi.U receive the incoming calI. Both
extensions will continue to ring until the call is answered.
28
S-DBS Operating instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
Paging * &rogramming
Require&
Paging lets you contact people who are temporarily away from their phones, give
instructions to the entire staff, or communicate with several staff members at once.
Internal paging is possible through the speakers of other phones and through the
speakers of external paging systems.
There are a maximum of three paging zones. Programming determines which
telephones are included in these zones. The chart below will help to keep track of the
telephones assigned to each zone.
In zones 1 and 2 you can make an announcement only through the speaker of the
telephone. In zone 3 you can make an announcement through the telephone and the
external paging system.
ZonePaging
1.
-~--.-
2;
3.
Pick up the receiver
--~~-- Press # 01 to page Zone 01. The EXT LED will light red
Make your announcement
by speaking through the receiver.
Section 700
issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating instructions
Vl .o
All-Zone Paging
You can make an announcement through the speakers of all the telephones in every
zone as well as the external paging system.
1.
Pick up receiver
2.
Keyin#OO
3.
Make announcement.
Background
-_-.----
-- -....
-. -
Music (BGM)
You can play background music through an extema.I paging system.
When a paging call is established, -BGM will go off automatically.
Meet-Me Answer
You can answer a paging call at any nearby extension, even if the extension is not
within the same paging group.
To answer a paged call
1.
Pick up receiver at any nearby extension.
OR
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press 77. Paging will stop, allowing you to speak with the pager. The
EXT LED lights red.
Outside Line Off-Hook
Signal * mogramming
Required>
You can program an alert tone to signal a second incoming call while you are on
another intercom or outside line call with certain exceptions.
You cannot receive outside Jine calls: during conference calls, while the phone is
ringing on an incoming call or while using an outside line other than an assigned one.
--___
30
___..
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
DIALING ALTERNATIVES
Redial
The REDIAL key repeats the last number dialed up to a maximum
maximurn of five speed dialing codes can also be redialed.
1.
of 16 digits.’ A
Press a line key
c-3
.
3.
Press REDIAL key
4.
If the number is still busy, you can press REDIAL key again only ifthe
system is programmed for Auto-Flash-F&dial.
The outside line is
flashed once automatically and the last number is redialed.
To check a redialed number:
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press CONF key
3.
Press REDIAL key
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Save/Repeat
Dial
Redials a previously dialed outside line number.
be lost. even if you dial another number.
To save a dialed number
Unlike redial, the number will not
(During outside line call)
1.
Press AUTO key twice
2.
Press *
NOTE: Saved numbers are erased when a new number is saved.
To check a saved number:
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press CONF key
3.
Press AUTO key
To repeat a dialed number
1.
Press a line key
2.
Press AUTO key
3.
Press *
32
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
You can store frequently dialed numbers in a PSD key, thereby, reducing the possibility of dialing wrong numbers and allowing instant dialing at the touch of a key.
To store PSD Numbers on a One-Touch
key
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press PROG key
3.
Press One-Touch key (each telephone has 10 One-touch keys).
4.
Dial number
5.
Press HOLD key
6.
Press ON/OFF key
NOTE: You can also store a number in PSD using: AUTO key and 90-99
--__
-_
S-DBS’Operating
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
Instructions
To access a stored PSD number
1.
Press the line key
2.
Press One-Touch key
To check a stored PSD number
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press- CONF ~__--_-.-.
key
3.
Press One-Touch key
To cancel a stored PSD number
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press PROG key
3.
Press One-Touch key
4.
Press HOLD key
34
-
-
-_- -..
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
System
Speed Dial (SSD)
You can store frequently dialed numbers in an SSD key allowing instant dialing at the
touch of a key. Numbers entered in the SSD memory can only be entered fi-om
extensions 10 and 11.
To store SSD Numbers * 4vailabZe
__..- ---
only on extensions
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press PROG key
3.
Press AUTO key
-. - .-..__~.
__.
4.
Key in SSD code (00 - 89)
5.
Dial number
6.
Press HOLD key
7.
Press ON/OFF key
10 and 11~
Section 700
Issue 1.July 1990
S-DBS Operating instructions
_I.-______.
To access a stored SSD number
Press a line key
1.
2.
Press AUTO key
3.
Enter the SSD code (00-89)
To check an SSD number
* uWaiZabZe on all extensions,
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press CONF key
3.
Press AUTO key
4.
Enter SSD code (00 - 89)
To cancel a stored SSD number
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press PROG key
3.
Press AUTO key
4.
Enter SSD code (00 - 89)
5.
Press HOLD key
36
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
issue 1 July 1990
Assigning
Two
SSD Codes to a Single One-Touch
Key
If you assign a frequently used access code to one SSD code and a telephone number
to a second SSD code, you can dial the telephone number by entering the first SSD
code followed by the second SSD code. However, both SSD codes can be programmed
on a One-Touch key.
-
---.._
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press PROG key
3.
Press the One-Touch key
4:
----
Press AUTO key
-- -
5.
Key in the first SSD code for the access code.
6.
Press REDIAL key to insert a pause between the access code and the
telephone number if necessary. Repeat for a longer pause.
8.
Key in the second SSD code for the telephone number.
9.
Press HOLD key
10.
Press ON/OFF key
_.- ~- - .--- ..-- .- .
Section 700
.-.....--_._-.-._.Issue. 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
----w-;3----------~
DTMF Signal Conversion
You can change from pulse to tone dialing, even on a rotary telephone. However, once
you make the change to tone you cannot change back to pulse on the same call. Also,
you cannot send tone signals either during a call or while you are dialing.
1.
Press line key
2.
Press * or # key
3.
Replacing the receiver returns the line to pulse.
NOTE: You can program the * or # key in speed dialing.
DATA
SECURITY
* &rogramming
Required>
Prevents interruptions by other extensions during data transmission or conversation.
During conversation press the AUTO key twice followed by the % key.
For data transmission security, ask your authorized dealer for more detaiIs:
!Xm
38
I
No
!
YES i
NO
Data security not possible
AUTO, AUTO, #
to active data security
YES
Data security
Data security
Section 700
issue 1 July 1990
ACCOUNT CODES/SMDR
Account
Code Station
Message Detail Recorder
(SMDR)
When a serial interface printer is connected to S-DBS, information such as call dates
and times, numbers called, outside line numbers used, etcetera, can be printed for
each account by entering its code number.
Separate account numbers can be assigned to different clients for preparing bills.
Each account code can be a maximum of ten digits. Enter the code either before
dialing or during the call.
Before data can be sent from the S-DBS to the SMDR printer you must enter # 93 from
the attendant’s telephone. This is a one-time operation. The S-DBS will continue to
send data to the printer, even if the printer is disconnected.
To enter an Account
Code before dialing out
Rick up the receiver
1.
OR
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press AUTO key OR (# 7 if using a DTMF SLT)
3.
Press #
4.
Key in the account code (up to 10 digits)
5.
Press #
6.
Press a line key
__---
7.
-...~~
- -..- ----- ..-.
Key in the telephone number.
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
To enter an Account
Code during an outside call
1.2essAu~o~ey~
-----.-.
-. -- -...---.----_______
2.
Press #
3.
Key in the account code (up to 10 digits).
4.
Press #
NOTE: Not available on SLT.
40
__ .._
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
TOLL RESTRICTIONS
Toll Restriction
System * &ogramming
Required>
You can assign access levels to specific extensions or outside lines which force long
ili3.&W~5%lk to-particular lines or prevent after hours calls.
The five major access levels are as follows:
Qpe
0:
Cannot place or receive outside calls. Only intercom calls are possible.
Type 1:
Cannot place outside calls, but can receive incoming calls.
Type 2:
Can make only local calls and programmed special area code table 1 calls
and l-800 or 800 calls. Cannot make 411, 555 or 976 calls.
Type 3:
Can make only local calls and programmed special area code table 1 and
table 2 calls.
Type 4:
No restrictions
Note:
Station
The station lockout key code restriction is also available.
. system-to--allow-system-spee-d-diakng:- -- .-Pograml
Lockout
l
<Programming
You can also
Required>
You can prevent others from using your phone to place outside line calls by dialing
a four-digit code which has been programmed from the attendant’s phone. However,
the locked-out phone can still be used for intercom calls.
To set or reset Station
Lockout
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Key in 74 to lockout the station.
3.
Key in the four-digit
4.
Press ON/OFF key
code
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
VI .o
To program
Station
Lockout
code
l
4vailabZe
only
1.
Press ON/OFF key
2.
Press PROG key
3.
Dial # 8
4.
Enter extension port number - 2 digits
5.
Enter 4-digit code (any)
6.
Press HOLD key.
__--.--
42
_
___
.._----...
c
on
-.~.
extensions
..-.
-
10,
--.
ll>
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
DOOR
BOX
Door Boxes A and B * Programming
Required>
You can screen callers without opening the door. The system supports two door boxes,
A and B. Use code 61 for door box A and code 62 for door box B.
-~
__ -- _. _
To call a door box
1.
Pick up receiver
2.
Key in code 61 for door box A or code 62 for door box B.
3.
Speak to caller (you cannot signal the caller)
To answer a door box call
Pick up receiver
1.
Door Opener
A door opener wiIl activate the system at the touch of a dial key.
Speaking to a door box caller
1.
Dial 66
2.
A or B wiII open depending on which door you address.
OR
Opening a door box without
..___-
speaking to caller
1.
Dial 67 to open Door Box A
2.
Dial 68 to open Door Box B
NOTE: If the door opener does not function,
re-diaI66.
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Sensor * <Programming
Required>
The sensor has a sensor detecting terminal. If heat or water leakage sensors are
installed, a warning tone will be sent to the extensions upon detecting abnomal
conditions.
--.-..
. - .--.
Cancelling
..--.
. ---.-
a warning
tone from an extensioti
1.
Lift receiver
2.
Replace receiver
44
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
MEMO
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
issue 1 July 1990
S-DBS Operating Instructions
VI .o
F
Index
FCC iii
Registration Number iii
FLASH Key 4. 12. 19, 25
Flexible Function Key 6
A
Account Code 39
Alarm 28
Answering CalIs 14
-w-wAutomatic
Answer 16
G
Group CaII Pickup
TL3a39&0--.He
B
Background Music 30
Busy Ovenide 23
c
CaII Back Request 25
CalI Forwarding 23
CalI Pickup 16
Directed 16
Group 17
callwaiting
15
CONF Key 4, 19, 20, 31. 32. 34, 36
Conference CaUs 19
Add-On Conference 19
Extension 19
Outside Line 19
17
.---.- _~_..
:L- .-.-_--__-___---.-.-_.
Hands-Free Answer Back
Headset 10
Hearing Aid iv
Hold Recall 18
Holding CaIIs 14, 18
Exclusive Hold 18
Hold RecaII 18
Intercom Hold 14
Outside Line Hold 18
System Hold 18
Hybrid System 2
I, J, K, L
Intercom CaIIs 13
Attendant CaII 13
Extension CalI 13
Tone CalI 13
Voice CaII 13
D
M
Data Security 38
Delayed Ring ‘28
Dial CO Access 11
DiaI Tone Stop 10
Dimension 1
Directed CaII Pickup 16
Display Contrast 8
Do-Not-Disturb 24
Door Bax 43
Door Opener 43
DSS Telephone 4
DTMF Signal Conversion 38
Dual Port System. See Hybrid System
Making an Outside CalI
Meet-Me Answer 30
Message Waiting 25
MUTE Key 4. 14
E
ExternalPaging
46
29
14
11
N
Night Key 20
0
Off-Hook Signal 30
0%Hook Voice Announce 27
One-Touch Key 7, 33, 37
S-DBS Operating Instructions
Vl .o
Section 700
Issue 1 July 1990
Paging 10. 29
AU Zone Paging 30
Ehtemal Page 29
Meet-Me Answer 30
Personal Speed Dial 33
PooledTnmk
9. 12
Primcy Release 20
PROG Key 4. 7. 22, 33, 34. 35. 37. 42
-. pw!m-g
3
psD 3<,7’-.
___
R -..-.-
----..--
-.
Radio InGrference v
REDIALKey 4. 25. 31. 37
Repeat Dial 32
Ringer Equivalence iii
S
Save DiaI 32
Sensor 44
SMDR 39
SSD 35
Station Lockout 41
System Configuration 5
System Speed Dial 35
T, U
Toll Restriction 41
Tone Call 13
Transfer 21
~-Auto~ti~~er-2L-.--.--.-..Screened 21
Unscreened 21
On-Hook Transfer 2 1
Tnmk Queuing 26
v, w, x. Y
Voice Call 13
Volume 8
Dial Tone Volume 8
Display Contrast 8
Receiver Volume 8
Ring Volume 8
z
Zone Paging 29, 30
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement